JP2021078786A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a performance executed based on satisfaction of a start condition.SOLUTION: While a performance control CPU restricts execution of a blackout performance in winning without executing processing (step S25TM1040 to step S25TM1080) for determining presence or absence of execution of a blackout performance in winning by determining NO in step S25TM1030 when start winning occurs during a pattern stop period or during a pattern determination period in performance determination processing at the time of start winning, the performance control CPU can execute a flash performance in winning by executing processing (step S25TM1090 to step S25TM1130) for determining presence or absence of execution of a flash performance in winning.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when the pre-determination unit acquires game data transmitted from the main control board, it determines whether or not the game data is data indicating a jackpot, and the timing at which the pre-determination is performed. Disclosed is a gaming machine in which the suggested gaming production currently in progress suddenly stops and freezes.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-188261 (paragraphs 011 to 0114)

As for a gaming machine such as a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, which executes an effect based on the establishment of a starting condition, there is room for improving the interest of the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a production performed based on the establishment of a starting condition.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
The start condition is satisfied (the game ball is won in the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is controlled, and the number of reserved memories is A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display of special identification information (variable display of special symbols) based on (not 0) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. ) And
Execution of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening). CPU 103) and
An effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect based on a determination by the determination means, and
In response to the execution of the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is displayed for a specific period (symbol stop period and symbol confirmation period). ), And a decorative variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be displayed over
With
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the start condition.
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation that is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning has a higher expectation of big hit than the flash effect at the time of winning).
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see (as shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when a prize-winning blackout effect is executed as a special effect, By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. The visibility is reduced and it becomes difficult to see),
When a predetermined type of special effect different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (6), only the flash effect at the time of winning as a special effect. Is executed, but the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. The visibility of [3rd layer] does not decrease and becomes visible),
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined type of special effect while restricting the execution of the specific type of special effect when the start condition is satisfied in the specific period (FIGS. 9-6 and 9). As shown in -7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred in a specific period, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted, but specified. Even with the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that occurred during the period, it is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information in a specific period, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, secure an opportunity to execute the special effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 078IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 078IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 078IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 078IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 078IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 4th symbol variation display and the stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of transitioning to a time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of transitioning to a time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode at the time of transitioning to a time saving state. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of various effects in modification 1. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of various effects in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing in modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table in the modification 5. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for loss (with time reduction) / loss (without time reduction), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. C) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. (A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing a layer structure, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a layer structure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the blackout effect at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of start winning of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of start winning of 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the symbol suspension period and the symbol confirmation period. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, and (B) is an explanation showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and the effect mode. FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect and the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the comment notice effect is executed and the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the final display mode of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of a change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of a change effect. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the blackout effect at the time of winning, the connection zone effect, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the effect related to the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode about the blackout effect at the time of a prize, the connection zone effect, the flash effect at the time of a prize, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the effect related to the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the flash effect at the time of a prize, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of start winning of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of start winning of the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production mode related to the prize-winning character production, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production mode related to the blessing character production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12) Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 078IW) Next, the feature 078IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 078IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by the average in the ordinary game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probability variation state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

(Board composition)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 078IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 078IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed LED078IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed notification LED 078IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the fourth symbol display 078IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 078IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. LED.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability, time saving loss probability)
8-2 and 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 8-3 shows the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest (about 1/320) with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "328/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/200), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B), the probability variation state (in both the case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "3280/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/20), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probable state.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore). , Regardless of whether it is in the probable state or the non-probable state), the small hit probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). The small hit probability is constant as "9362/65536" (about 1/7) regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state. That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, even when the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value as described above, while the small hit probability and the time saving loss probability are set to be constant. By making the probability of loss without time reduction different between the set values "1" to "6", the number of judgment values for each set value may be matched.

The examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability. For example, there may be a case where the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, a determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Fig. 8-2), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs.

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. After shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

The "sudden probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. After shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot", 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game. The large winning opening is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the large winning opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (hence, a short period of time for the jackpot). Opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", it is practically impossible to expect a prize in the big prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the player suddenly changed to the probability change state.

Further, in this example, even in the case of a "small hit", the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.5 seconds, which is extremely short during the small hit game, and the appearance is "suddenly probable big hit". The grand prize opening of the same aspect is opened.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, and 40%. It is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" with a probability, and is determined to be a "sudden change jackpot" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, 55. With a% probability, it is determined as a "probability change jackpot", and with a 5% probability, it is determined as a "sudden change jackpot".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) and 8-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is out of time, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case of loss, there is a 1/3 chance that it will be determined as "time saving loss A", a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss B", and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time saving loss C". Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-5, various modes can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be out of time, the probability of determining "time reduction out of C" is increased, while when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be out of time, "time reduction is out". The determination ratio of the time saving type may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as increasing the determination probability of "missing A".

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 8-6, in this example, in the normal state, when the time reduction is "A", the time reduction is controlled to 100 times, and when the time reduction is "B", the time reduction is 50. It is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times, and when it becomes "time saving out of C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times. Further, in the time saving state, when "time saving loss A" occurs, the time saving state is controlled until the next big hit, and when "time saving loss B" occurs, the time saving state is controlled to 200 times, and "time saving loss". When it becomes "C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving.

In this example, as will be described later, the time reduction may not be determined in the probabilistic state.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-6. For example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time-saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time-saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 078IW. Of these, FIG. 8-7 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big hits and small hits. Further, FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-7 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time saving state, which is controlled via the time saving time loss. Further, FIG. 8-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α). It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIGS. 8-7 (C) and 8-7 (D), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) are determined in the time saving state. The rate of fluctuation is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot as compared with the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time saving state. Is getting shorter.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 is an example, and various modes can be considered. For example, when the time reduction state occurs and the time reduction state is controlled again during the time reduction state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the time reduction state controlled via the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-7 (C). The table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next big hit among the cases where the time saving is lost (in this example, the time saving state is A during the time saving state), via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C). The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled by.

(Direction control command)
8-9 and 8-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). is there.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A. is there. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time saving B designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation B. is there. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time saving C designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation C. is there.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command as the probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden probability change jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly changed to the probability change jackpot. ..

The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. is there.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. is there.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. The command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of right-handed notification.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-9 and 8-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Special design normal processing)
8-11 and 8-12 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 078IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 078IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 078IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 078IWS54).

In this feature unit 078IW, by executing the processes of steps 078IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 078IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 078IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 078IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 078IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 078IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 078IWS63), the process proceeds to step 078IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step 078IWS63), the process proceeds to step 078IWS66. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

In step 078IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 078IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

On the other hand, in step 078IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-2 is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is "second". , The small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-3 is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the hit determination random number, and determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 078IWS67).

If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 078IWS69). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

Unless it is decided to make a small hit (N in step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 078IWS70). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 078IWS74. In this example, by executing the process of step 078IWS, it is determined that, in the case of the probabilistic state, the process of step 078IWS71 is determined to be the loss without the time reduction as it is without performing the subsequent time reduction determination process. To.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. (Step 078IWS71). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See FIG. 8-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 8-3).

If it is determined to be out of time (Y in step 078IWS72), the CPU 103 has a type corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (out of time A or out of time). B, time saving loss C) is determined as the type of time saving loss (step 078IWS73). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

In step 078IWS73, the time saving type determination is performed using the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 078IWS65 and the common type determination random number. Further, when the small hit type is also determined, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number in the small hit type determination in addition to the large hit type determination and the time saving type determination. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type, whether to make a small hit, and the time saving type (step 078IWS74). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided and suddenly decided to be a probabilistic big hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided to be "9", and if it is decided to be a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided to be "1". However, if it is decided to set the time saving out of A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4". However, if it is decided that the time reduction is out of C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6", and if it is decided to be out of time (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is "-". To decide. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 078IWS75).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 078IWS76).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (step 078IWS1701). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit and small hit fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step). 078IWS1702).

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 078IWS1703). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select E (step 078IWS1704). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table E on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 078IWS1705). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 078IWS1706). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 078IWS1707). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 078IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 078IWS1709).

Next, the CPU 103 is based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 078IWS1702, S1704, S1706, S1708, and S1709, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. , Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 is used (step 078IWS1710). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1711).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 078IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 078IWS1712), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 078IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 078IWS1714).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, and then decides whether or not to make a small hit, if it has not yet been transmitted. As a result, control to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the jackpot type and the determination result of the time saving type is controlled. (Step 078IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 078IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 078IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step). 078IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 078IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 078IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 078IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 078IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

If the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (that is, in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 measures the symbol confirmation period for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 078IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

Unless it is decided to be out of time (N in step 078IWS1124), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to "0". A value corresponding to ".5 seconds" is set (step 078IWS1132). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1133). .. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 078IWS1134).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 078IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 078IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. To do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 078IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, sets a probability change flag, a time reduction flag A, a time reduction flag B, and a time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state. Reset (step 078IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS136).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS137). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 078IWS138). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 078IWS139).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 078IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step 078IWS140). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 078IWS141). Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 078IWS142). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B and ends the time reduction state (step 078IWS143).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS144). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS145). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS146).

In this example, the process of steps 078IWS140 to S146 is executed to shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification in the time saving final variation. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, the right-handed notification may be terminated by shifting to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 078IWS147). When the small hit flag is set, the small hit start designation command is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS148). Next, the CPU 103 sets the time timer before opening the big winning opening (step 078IWS149). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S118) (step 078IWS150).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if it is out of order), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is the case that the time saving is out of order (step 078IWS151). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75. Unless it is decided to be out of time (that is, in the case of out of time (no time reduction)), the process proceeds to step 078IWS167.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (step 078IWS152). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time saving number counter if it is out of time saving A (Y in step 078IWS153). (Step 078IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 078IWS155) (step 078IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "30" in the time reduction counter (step 078IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (that is, in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time reduction counter to 0 if the time reduction is out of A (Y in step 078IWS158) (that is, in the time reduction state). Step 078IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "200" to the time reduction counter (step 078IWS161) if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 078IWS160). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 078IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 078IWS163). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 078IWS164). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 controls an external device such as a hall computer to start external output of two jackpot signals (step 078IWS166).

By executing the processing of steps 078IWS164 and S165, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, by executing the process of step 078IWS166, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 078IWS167).

(External output signal)
FIG. 8-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8-17, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started (see step 078IWS166).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 078IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 078IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 078IWS532) and controls transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) in the jackpot end display timer (step 078IWS534), and performs processing. finish.

In step 078IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 078IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 078IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 078IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 078IWS538). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by checking, for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 078IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls the probability variation state (step 078IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS542).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 078IWS543).

(State transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 078IW will be described. FIG. 8-19 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 078IW. As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the normal state, when a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs, it is controlled to the probabilistic state (see step 078IWS541), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving state A (via the jackpot). (See steps 078IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time reduction state B (time reduction state via the time reduction deviation) when the time reduction deviation symbol is derived and displayed (see step 078IWS164).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the probabilistic state, when a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs, the probabilistic jackpot is controlled again (see step 078IWS541), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 078IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, there is no case where the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 078IWS70).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the time saving state A, when a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability variation state is controlled (see step 078IWS541), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state is again achieved. It is controlled to A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 078IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, even if it is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 078IWS164). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state is controlled (see steps 078IWS140 to S143).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the time saving state B, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see step 078IWS541), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction state A It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 078IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled again (see step 078IWS164). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variation display of 30, 50, 100, or 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state is controlled (see steps 078IWS140 to S143). However, if the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state B due to the time saving loss A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 078IWS158 and S159).

In this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction type, and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state A is configured to continue as it is. You may.

In this example, when a normal jackpot occurs during the time saving state B, the case where the time saving state A is uniformly shifted is shown, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state B is continued as it is. It may be configured to do so.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 078IW. In FIG. 8-20, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 078IWS701). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 078IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

(4th design)
FIG. 8-21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation display of the fourth symbol and a display mode of the stop symbol executed in the fourth symbol process process of step 078IWS701. When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the two LEDs arranged above and below are alternately turned on and off in the fourth symbol display 078IW21a and 21b. By repeating the above, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

When the fluctuation time is completed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start of the symbol determination period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), in the case of a big hit, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in red. Further, in the case of a small hit, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in green. In addition, when the time reduction is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time reduction deviation symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. Further, in the case of a loss (no time reduction), a stop display is displayed with the two LEDs arranged above and below as an out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) turned off.

The mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is derived and displayed in a mode in which the jackpot type and the time saving type can be distinguished. May be good.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the case where a dedicated symbol is provided as the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the fourth symbol is shown. In some cases, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be a common symbol.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-22 to 8-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 078IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 078IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 078IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 078IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 078IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 078IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation If it is (B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 078IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 078IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 078IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 078IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS626). If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 078IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 078IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 078IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 078IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 078IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 078IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 078IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 078IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 078IWS638).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 078IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS640). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 078IWS1126), so that it is right at the start of the symbol confirmation period. The lighting of the striking notification LED 078IW20 is started.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 078IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS642).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 078IWS643). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 078IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 078IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 078IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 078IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 078IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 078IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 078IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. To do. When the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 has a combination of decorative symbols of "135" as a stop symbol (small hit / sudden probability change). The jackpot design) is decided.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of the decorative symbols of the outlier symbols including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the outlier symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) that reminds us of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of a miss is called a missed symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 078IWS803). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 078IWS805). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this feature unit 078IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 078IWS806).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 078IWS807).

(Variable display during production processing)
8-25 and 8-26 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 078IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 078IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 078IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 078IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 078IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 078IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 078IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 078IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 078IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 078IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 078IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 078IWS856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 078IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 078IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 078IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 078IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 078IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 078IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 078IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 078IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 078IWS857, and there is no case where the process proceeds to the process after step 078IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 078IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
8-27 and 8-28 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 078IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 078IWS871). Step 078IWS872). Confirmation after subtraction If the value of the effect period timer has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 078IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 078IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 078IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 078IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being fixedly displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol). (Step 078IWS879).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y in step 078IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS881). Then, the process ends.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y in step 078IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit stop flag indicating that the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS883). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 078IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 078IWS885). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 078IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 078IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 078IWS887). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 078IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 078IWS889).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 078IWS890).

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 078IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 078IWS892). Whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 078IWS893). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 078IWS894). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 078IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 078IWS896).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 078IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, if the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the variable display start of the effect control process flag value. The value is updated according to the process (step S170) (step 078IWS898).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode when shifting to the time saving state will be described. 8-29 to 8-31 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode when shifting to the time saving state. Of these, FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30 show specific examples of the effect mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state via the big hit. Further, FIG. 8-31 shows a specific example of the effect mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state via the time saving deviation. In addition, in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, with reference to FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30, a specific example of the effect mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state via the big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-29 (A), in the image display device 5, a normal jackpot symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of "666") is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and a jackpot game starts. It is assumed that the period (fanfare period) has been entered. In this example, 20 seconds is secured as the fanfare period of the jackpot game, and during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (B), the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS887). ). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (B), the character image 078IW30 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 078IW31 such as "shift to sunset mode" is displayed as the character dialogue. As a result, the mode transition effect is executed, and it is notified that the time saving state A is shifted.

Further, in this example, when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed LED078IW10 is started to be lit (see step 078IWS135), and the right-handed notification LED078IW20 is also started to be lit (see step 078IWS640). At the same time, as shown in 29 (B), the image display device 5 also starts displaying the right-handed icon image 078IW40.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the fanfare period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-29 (C) (see step 078IWS887). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (C), the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the character display 078IW32 such as "right-handed!" On the image display device 5.

Next, when the fanfare period elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (D), the character display 078IW33 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed, and the round period of the big hit game shifts. Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the time saving state A, and as shown in FIG. 8-30 (E), the image display device 5 switches to the background image corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot). (See step 078IWS634). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (E), "sunset mode" is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to the yellow display color.

Next, a specific example of the effect mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state via the time saving deviation will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-31. As shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), in the image display device 5, a time-saving missed symbol (in this example, a combination of missed symbols including a special symbol (star symbol)) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It shall be. In this example, 20 seconds is secured as the symbol confirmation period of the time-shortened symbol, and during the symbol confirmation period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (B). See step 078IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the character image 078IW34 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 078IW35 such as "shift to forest mode" is displayed as the character dialogue. As a result, the mode transition effect is executed, and it is notified that the time saving state B is shifted.

Further, in this example, the right-handed LED 078IW10 is started to be lit (see step 078IWS1125) and the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 is also started to be lit (step 078IWS640) at the start of the symbol determination period when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the image display device 5 also starts displaying the right-handed icon image 078IW41.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-31 (C) (see step 078IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (C), the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the character display 078IW36 such as "right-handed!" On the image display device 5.

Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the state is shifted to the time saving state B, and as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), the background image corresponding to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is displayed in the image display device 5. (See step 078IWS636). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), "forest mode" is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to the green display color.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the right-handed icon images 078IW40 and 41 are displayed when the right-handed LED078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED078IW20 start lighting. The images 078IW40 and 41 are started to be displayed in conjunction with the start of lighting of the right-handed LED078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED078IW20, and are erased in conjunction with the extinguishing of the right-handed LED078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED078IW20.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of various effects in the feature unit 078IW will be described. 8-32 and 8-33 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of various effects in the feature unit 078IW. Of these, FIG. 8-32 (A) shows the execution timing of various effects in the case of a big hit (normal big hit). Further, FIG. 8-32 (B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the deviation (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-33 (A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-33 (B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the time reduction state.

First, with reference to FIG. 8-32 (A), the execution timing of various effects in the case of a big hit (normal big hit) will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), when a big hit (normal big hit) is reached, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and when the big hit symbol (normal big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, 0.5. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed over a short symbol confirmation period of 1 second (see step 078IWS1132). Further, in the case of a big hit, 20 seconds is secured as the fanfare period of the big hit game, and during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5. (See step 078IWS887). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the fanfare period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A) (see step 078IWS887). Next, when the fanfare period elapses, the round period and interval period of the jackpot game are repeated, and when all the rounds are completed and the ending period is completed (when the jackpot game is completed), the time saving state A is shifted to, and FIG. As shown in (A), the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image having a yellow display color) according to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot) (see step 078IWS634). ..

In the example shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), a case where a normal jackpot is obtained is shown, but when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot or the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated, the image display device 5 responds to the probability variation state. It can be switched to the background image (in this example, the background image of the red display color) (see step 078IWS638).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-32 (B), the execution timing of various effects when the deviation (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), when the deviation (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and when the deviation display (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the display is stopped. The out-of-order symbols (no time reduction) are confirmed and displayed over a short symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 078IWS1132). Further, when the symbol determination period ends, the background image (in this example, the background image of the blue display color) corresponding to the normal state is continuously displayed (see step 078IWS632).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the case where the deviation occurs during the normal state (no time reduction) is shown, but for example, when the deviation occurs during the probabilistic state (no time reduction), the fluctuation occurs. Since the background image according to the probable change state (in this example, the background image of the red display color) is displayed before the start, the background image according to the probable change state even after the end of the symbol confirmation period (in this example). , The background image of the red display color) is continuously displayed. Further, for example, when the time saving state A is out of alignment (no time saving), a background image (in this example, a background image having a yellow display color) corresponding to the time saving state A is displayed from before the start of fluctuation. Therefore, even after the end of the symbol determination period, the background image (in this example, the background image of the yellow display color) corresponding to the time saving state A is continuously displayed. Further, for example, when the time reduction state B is lost (no time reduction), the background image (in this example, the background image of the green display color) corresponding to the time reduction state B is displayed from before the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, even after the end of the symbol determination period, the background image corresponding to the time saving state B (in this example, the background image of the green display color) is continuously displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-33 (A), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (A), when the time reduction occurs during the normal state, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and when the time reduction deviation symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds. The time-saving out-of-time symbol is confirmed and displayed (see step 078IWS1128). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-33 (A), the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-33 (A) (see step 078IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state B, and as shown in FIG. 8-33 (A), the background image corresponding to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the green display color) can be switched (see step 078IWS636).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-33 (B), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), when the time reduction is lost during the time reduction state, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and when the time reduction deviation symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds. The time-saving out-of-time symbol is confirmed and displayed (see step 078IWS1130). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), the continuous effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS852). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state B, and as shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), the background image corresponding to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is displayed in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the green display color) can be switched (see step 078IWS636).

In this example, if the time saving is out of A during the time saving state, the time saving state is continued until the next big hit. In this case, for example, "∞" is displayed in the continuous production. , It may be configured to suggest that the time saving state continues until the next big hit.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 078IW, even if the same time reduction is lost, the case where the symbol determination period is different depending on whether the time is in the normal state or the time reduction state (20 seconds and 10 seconds) is shown. Not limited to such an aspect, the symbol determination period may be uniformly set to the same period. FIG. 8-34 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects in the first modification. Of these, FIG. 8-34 (A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-34 (B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the time reduction state.

In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state is the same as in FIG. 8-33 (A). In the first modification, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), 20 seconds is secured as the symbol determination period as in the case where the time reduction occurs during the normal state. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), the continuous effect is executed over the symbol determination period of 20 seconds. By sharing the symbol determination period between the normal state and the time-saving state in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

In the first modification, the case where the time saving is lost between the normal state and the time saving state is shown in the case where the symbol determination period is standardized to 20 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol confirmation period when the time reduction occurs between the normal state and the time reduction state is standardized to 0.5 seconds so that the mode transition effect, right-handed notification, and continuous effect are not executed even if the time reduction occurs. It may be configured.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 078IW, if the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is already in progress. Therefore, the symbol confirmation period is secured for 10 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal state, and the continuous effect is executed. Although the case of notifying the continuation of the time saving state is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. FIG. 8-35 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects in the second modification. Of these, FIG. 8-35 (A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-35 (B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the time reduction state.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (A), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction is lost during the normal state is the same as in FIG. 8-33 (A). In the second modification, if the time reduction is lost during the time reduction state, a short period of 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B) so that the continuous effect is not executed. It may be configured as. Even with such a configuration, since the time saving state continues even before the start of the fluctuation that is out of time saving, it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the game state even if the continuous effect is not executed. , No problem occurs.

(Modification example 3)
FIG. 8-36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, as shown in FIG. 8-36, the determination process of step 078IWS70 is not provided in the special symbol normal processing, and the time reduction after step 078IWS71 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state. Judgment processing is executed. However, in the modified example 3, as shown in FIG. 8-36, when the time saving is determined to be out of time (Y in step 078IWS72) and the time saving type is determined (step 078IWS73), the probability change flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it is present (step 078IWS73X). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 does not shift to step 078IWS74 and forcibly determines the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) as the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 078IWS74X). ). Even if it is configured as shown in the processing flow of FIGS. 8-36, it can be configured so that the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed when it is in the probabilistic state.

In addition, in the modification 3, other processing of the special symbol normal processing is the same as the processing shown by the above-mentioned feature part 078IW.

(Modification example 4)
The above-mentioned feature unit 078IW shows a case where the right-handed LED 078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED078IW20 are started to light at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time is out of time. The right-handed LED078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED078IW20 may be configured to start lighting at the end of. FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the modified example 4.

In the modified example 4, the process of steps 078IWS1125 and S1126 is not executed in the special symbol variation process. Instead, in the special symbol stop processing, when the CPU 103 controls to start the external output of the jackpot 2 signal (step 078IWS166), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED078IW10 (step 078IWS166A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS166B).

By executing the process of step 078IWS166A, in the modified example 4, when the time is out of time, the right-handed LED 078IW10 is started to be lit at the end of the symbol determination period. Further, by executing the process of step 078IWS166B, in the modification 4, when the time reduction is missed, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the end of the symbol confirmation period, so that the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the end of the symbol confirmation period. The lighting of the striking notification LED 078IW20 is started (see steps 078IWS639 and S640).

In the modified example 4, other processes of the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process are the same as the processes shown in the above-mentioned feature unit 078IW.

(Modification 5)
FIG. 8-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the modified example 5. In this example, the fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and E are the same as the fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and E shown in the above-mentioned feature section 078IW.

In the above-mentioned feature unit 078IW, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is compared with the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation. The case where the selection probability of is as high as 80% and the average fluctuation time is short is shown. On the other hand, in Example 5, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 (C) and 8-38 (D), even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation. In this case, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot.

As described above, the features 078IW and each of the modified examples disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means A1-1), (means A1-2) to (means A11). ..

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some such gaming machines are configured to be able to display a second predetermined result that triggers control to a special state. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-210152 (paragraph 0029), a display mode in which the stop symbol is different from the special display mode, for example, "6, 6, 7", "4, 4, 5", "1, 2, When it becomes "3", the variable time (5 to 10 seconds) of the special symbol display device is shortened to a shorter predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and such time reduction is reduced to a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). It is described that it repeats continuously. Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-253794 (paragraphs 0046, 0047) describes that the number of time reductions is determined based on the reach pattern when the time reduction mode is not used when the reach is lost.

If the gaming machines described in JP-A-2002-210152 and JP-A-2002-253794 are applied, the special state is controlled with the display of the second predetermined result as an opportunity without going through the control to the advantageous state. be able to. However, it is necessary to secure an execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the control to the special state is started. On the other hand, if the display period of the second predetermined result is lengthened even when the second predetermined result is displayed in the special state in order to secure the execution period of the notification effect, the variable display efficiency is lowered. There's a problem. Therefore, it is an object of the following configuration of the gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of securing an execution period of the notification effect in a non-special state and improving the interest in the game.

(Means A1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a variable display is displayed based on the establishment of starting conditions (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). A variable display execution means that can execute and display the display result of the variable display (for example, a portion that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as the display result of the variable display. ) Is displayed, and a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. ) And a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the normal state). A state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 078IWS164, S537 to S539 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the variable display execution means has a predetermined result (for example, a predetermined result different from the specific result) as the display result of the variable display. , The outlier symbol) can be displayed, and as the predetermined result, the first predetermined result (for example, the outlier symbol (no time reduction)) that does not trigger the control of the special state and the second predetermined result that triggers the control of the special state. (For example, a symbol with a short time reduction) can be displayed, and in a non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds). A notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started during the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state for a longer time (see, for example, FIGS. 8-32 (B) and 8-33 (A)). A notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 078IWS847) that can execute (for example, a mode transition effect) is provided, and the display period (for example, 10 seconds) of the second predetermined result in the special state is It is characterized in that it is shorter than the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (see, for example, FIGS. 8-33 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state, improve the interest in the game, and display the first predetermined result and the second predetermined result in the special state. And can be shortened, and the variable display efficiency can be improved.

(Means A1-2) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a variable display is displayed based on the establishment of starting conditions (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). A variable display execution means that can execute and display the display result of the variable display (for example, a portion that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as the display result of the variable display. ) Is displayed, and a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. ) And a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the normal state). A state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 078IWS164, S537 to S539 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the variable display execution means has a predetermined result (for example, a predetermined result different from the specific result) as the display result of the variable display. , The outlier symbol) can be displayed, and as the predetermined result, the first predetermined result (for example, the outlier symbol (no time reduction)) that does not trigger the control of the special state and the second predetermined result that triggers the control of the special state. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be displayed, and in a non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds). A notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started during the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state for a longer time (see, for example, FIGS. 8-32 (B) and 8-33 (A)). (For example, a part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and display period information (for example, a part that can specify the display period of the variable display display result) that can execute the notification effect execution means (for example, the mode transition effect) can be specified. The information output means (for example, the part that executes steps 078IWS1129, S1131, and S1133 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output the symbol confirmation designation command) is provided, and the information output means has a display period of the first predetermined result. 1st display period information (for example, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation C designation command) and 2nd display period information (for example) that can specify the display period of the 2nd predetermined result ( For example, the first symbol confirmation A designation command, the second symbol confirmation A designation command, the first symbol confirmation B designation command, the second symbol confirmation B designation command) are output as different display period information, and the second in the special state. The display period of the predetermined result is a period common to the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (for example, in the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 8-34, in the normal state and in the time saving state. The symbol determination period is common to 20 seconds), and the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect based on the second display period information (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines Y in step 078IWS846, the step 078IWS847 is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state, improve the interest in the game, and execute the notification effect at an appropriate timing. Further, since the display period of the second predetermined result is a common period regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the control means by standardizing the processing.

(Means A2) In means A1-1 and means A1-2, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (for example, an inaccessible state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. A variable means that can be changed to a closed state (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) is provided, and the advantageous state control means controls the variable means to an approach advantageous state in the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). Controls the special variable winning ball device 7 in the open state in steps S114 to S117), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, an outlier symbol) without control of the approach advantageous state of the variable means. It may have been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the control of the special state even when the control of the approach advantageous state of the variable means is not accompanied, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the case of shifting to the time saving state when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide a small hit symbol with a time reduction, and when the small hit symbol with a time reduction is derived and displayed, it may be configured to shift to the time reduction state at the end of the small hit game.

(Means A3) In means A1-1, means A1-2, or means A2, a determination means for determining whether or not to display a second predetermined result as a display result of variable display (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100). (Part of executing 078IWS71) and high-probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high-probability state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is increased. The determination means does not determine whether or not to display the second predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step when Y in step 078IWS70). 078IWS71 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high probability state which is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A4) In means A1-1, means A1-2, or means A2, a determination means for determining whether or not to display a second predetermined result as a display result of variable display (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100). (Part of executing 078IWS71) and high-probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high-probability state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is increased. The variable display executing means displays the first predetermined result as the display result of the variable display when it is determined to display the second predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, variant 3). In step 078IWS73X, the game control microcomputer 100 may execute step 078IWS74X when it is Y). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high probability state which is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A4, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds and 10 seconds) is the display period of the specific result (for example, 0). Longer than (.5 seconds) (see, eg, FIGS. 8-32 (A), 8-33 (A), (B)), in a predetermined region (eg, in the gaming region) during the period in which control of the advantageous state is initiated. It is configured to include a promotion notification execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS887 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for prompting an operation of launching the game medium to the right region). It may have been. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the control of the advantageous state when a specific result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A5, the special state control means controls the special state with the end of the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, a game). The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, the promotion notification (for example, right) for prompting the launch operation of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the right area of the game area). A promotion notification executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 078IWS847) that can execute the striking notification) and an operation of launching the game medium into the predetermined area triggered by the start of the display period of the second predetermined result. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, a portion for executing step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100) for emitting light of a light emitting body (for example, a right-handed LED078IW10). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium should be launched into the predetermined area.

(Means A7) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A5, the special state control means controls the special state with the end of the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, a game). The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, the promotion notification (for example, right) for prompting the launch operation of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the right area of the game area). A promotion notification executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 078IWS847) and an operation of launching a game medium into a predetermined area are triggered by the end of the display period of the second predetermined result. (For example, in the modification 4, the portion that executes step 078IWS166A in the game control microcomputer 100) that causes the light emitting body (for example, the right-handed LED078IW10) to emit light is provided. May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium should be launched into the predetermined area.

(Means A8) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A7, the variable display executing means executes variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol). , Special variable display execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing variable display of special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) corresponding to variable display of identification information and displaying the display result of variable display of special identification information. The special variable display executing means includes a display result (for example, two LEDs are lit in blue) of the variable display of the special identification information in a mode different from the second predetermined result. It may be configured to display (for example, see FIG. 8-21 (B)). According to such a configuration, the progress of the game can be recognized.

(Means A9) A special signal capable of identifying that any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A8 is controlled to a special state when the display period of the second predetermined result ends. It may be configured to include a signal output means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting (for example, two jackpot signals). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the special state is controlled to the outside.

(Means A10) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A9, the special state control means displays the second predetermined result in the non-special state and the second predetermined result in the special state. It may be configured to control the special state (see, for example, FIG. 8-6) until the variable display is executed a different number of times depending on the case where is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the same second predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage differs depending on the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means A11) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A10, the variable display executing means has a disadvantageous second predetermined result (for example, a time saving C) as a second predetermined result and an advantage. 2 It is possible to display a predetermined result (for example, time saving out of A), and the special state control means can change the number of times when the advantageous second predetermined result is displayed more than when the disadvantageous second predetermined result is displayed. It may be configured to control the special state until the display is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-6). According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the second predetermined result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, the features 078IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B13).

(Means B1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a variable display is executed based on the establishment of starting conditions (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). , A variable display executing means capable of displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as the display result of the variable display. Based on what is displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. , Special state control that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to satisfy the starting condition than the non-special state (for example, the normal state) after being controlled to the advantageous state. Means (for example, a portion that executes steps 078IWS164 and S537 to S539 in the game control microcomputer 100) and background image display means for displaying the effect background image (for example, steps 078IWS632, S634, S636, S638 in the effect control CPU 120). The special state control means can control the special state based on the fact that a predetermined result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the specific result is displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and the variable display executing means performs a shortened variable display (for example, ultra-shortened variable, shortened variable) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the normal variable display. It is feasible, and the shortened variable display can be executed at different ratios depending on whether it is controlled to a special state based on the display of a predetermined result and a case where it is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state (). For example, (see FIGS. 8-7 (C) and 8-7 (D)), the background image display means is controlled to a special state based on the display of a predetermined result and to a special state after the advantageous state. It is characterized in that different effect background images are displayed depending on the case (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 078IWS634 and S636). According to such a configuration, the variable display tendency is different and the production background image is different depending on the event that triggered the control of the special state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means B2) In the means B1, when the variable display executing means is controlled to the special state based on the display of the predetermined result, it is shortened by a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state. It may be configured so that the variable display can be executed (for example, see FIGS. 8-38 (C) and (D) in the modified example 5). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to the special state based on the display of the predetermined result, the game value is not given as in the case of the control to the advantageous state, which is excessive. While suppressing gambling, it is possible to increase the variable display efficiency and improve the interest in the game.

(Means B3) In the means B1, when the variable display executing means is controlled to the special state based on the display of the predetermined result, it is shortened by a lower rate than the case where the variable display executing means is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state. It may be configured so that the variable display can be executed (see, for example, FIGS. 8-7 (C) and 8-7 (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variable display efficiency when the state is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to means B3, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (for example, an inaccessible disadvantage state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a closed state is provided, and the advantageous state control means controls the variable means to an approach advantageous state in the advantageous state (for example, a microcomputer for game control). 100 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 in the open state in steps S114 to S117), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, an outlier symbol) without control of the approach advantageous state of the variable means. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the control of the special state even when the control of the approach advantageous state of the variable means is not accompanied, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to the means B4, a determination means for determining whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of the variable display (for example, step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Part) and a high-probability state control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high-probability state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is increased. The determination means does not determine whether or not to display a predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute step 078IWS71 when it is Y in step 078IWS70). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high probability state which is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to the means B4, a determination means for determining whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of the variable display (for example, step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Part) and a high-probability state control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high-probability state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is increased. When it is determined to display a predetermined result in a high probability state, the variable display executing means displays a specific predetermined result that does not trigger the control of the special state as the display result of the variable display (for example, a modification). In 3, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 078IWS74X when it is Y in step 078IWS73X). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high probability state which is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B7) In any of means B1 to B6, the display period of a predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds and 10 seconds) is longer than the display period of a specific result (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, 0.5 seconds). , 8-32 (A), 8-33 (A), (B)), in the period when the control of the advantageous state is started, the game medium is transferred to a predetermined area (for example, the right area of the game area). It may be configured to include a promotion notification execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS887 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) that prompts a firing operation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the control of the advantageous state when a specific result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B8) In any one of the means B1 to the means B7, the special state control means controls the special state with the end of the display period of the predetermined result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 078IWS164). ), Promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for prompting an operation of launching a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, a region to the right of the game area) during a predetermined result display period. (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED078IW10) that prompts the firing operation of the game medium to the predetermined area are emitted with the start of the display period of the predetermined result. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium should be launched into the predetermined area.

(Means B9) In any one of the means B1 to the means B7, the special state control means controls the special state with the end of the display period of the predetermined result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 078IWS164). ), Promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for prompting an operation of launching a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, a region to the right of the game area) during a predetermined result display period. (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED078IW10) that prompts the firing operation of the game medium to the predetermined area are emitted when the display period of the predetermined result ends. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, a portion for executing step 078IWS166A in the game control microcomputer 100 in the modification 4). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium should be launched into the predetermined area.

(Means B10) In any one of the means B1 to the means B9, the variable display executing means executes variable display of the identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and the identification information is variably displayed. Correspondingly, the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) is executed, and the special variable display execution means (for example, step 078IWS701 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the display result of the variable display of the special identification information is executed. The special variable display executing means displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the two LEDs are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue) in a mode different from the predetermined result. (For example, see FIG. 8-21 (B)). According to such a configuration, the progress of the game can be recognized.

(Means B11) One of the means B1 to the means B10 outputs a special signal (for example, two jackpot signals) that can be identified as being controlled to a special state when the display period of a predetermined result ends. It may be configured to include a possible signal output means (eg, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 078IWS166). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the special state is controlled to the outside.

(Means B12) In any of the means B1 to the means B11, the special state control means has a different number of times depending on whether the predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state and the predetermined result is displayed in the special state. It may be configured to control the special state until the variable display is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-6). According to such a configuration, even when the same predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage differs depending on the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means B13) In any of means B1 to B12, the variable display executing means displays a disadvantageous predetermined result (for example, time saving loss C) and an advantageous predetermined result (for example, time saving loss A) as predetermined results. It is possible, and the special state control means controls the special state when the advantageous predetermined result is displayed until the variable display is executed more times than when the unfavorable predetermined result is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-6). See). According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the type of predetermined result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Explanation of feature 25TM]
Next, the feature portion 25TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-19. In the present embodiment, at the timing when the start winning is generated, it is possible to execute a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) to notify that the big hit expectation of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is high. Therefore, at a timing different from the timing when the start prize is generated (timing different from the execution timing of the special effect), a predetermined effect (chance described later) for notifying that the jackpot expectation of the variable display corresponding to the start prize is high. It is possible to perform eye production, comment notice production, change production).

(Light emitter 25TM100)
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to [Explanation of the feature unit 25TM] of the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the [Explanation of the feature unit 25TM] of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a light emitting body 25TM100 is provided in the vicinity (upper right part) of the image display device 5. The light emitter 25TM100 is made to emit light (lights up and / or blinks in this example). In the present embodiment, at the timing when the start winning is generated, a flash effect at the time of winning is performed to notify that the jackpot expectation of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is high. As an effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning, there are an effect mode in which the light emitting body 25TM100 emits white light and an effect mode in which the light emitting body 25TM100 emits red light. When the illuminant 25TM100 emits red light, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the illuminant 25TM100 emits white light (see FIG. 9-7 (B)).

Since the other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the gaming board 2 according to [Explanation of the feature unit 25TM] are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the gaming board 2 shown in FIG. 1, the description thereof will be omitted. ..

(Random value)
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the present embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of MR3, a random number value MR4 for determining a normal map display result, and a random number value MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Variation pattern judgment)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table is used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is "off (with time reduction)" or "off (without time reduction)" [off (with time reduction). / For miss (no time reduction)] Fluctuation pattern judgment table, [For small hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance to set the fluctuation display result to "small hit", and the fluctuation display result A [for big hit] fluctuation pattern determination table, which is used when it is decided in advance to make a "big hit", is prepared in advance.

[For off (with time reduction) / off (without time reduction)] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A loss", and "super" A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation pattern of "out of reach B" and the variation pattern of "out of reach C". There is.

The "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variation display result is "out of reach" after the variation display is started is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period is 12 seconds when it is determined that the variation pattern is “non-reach out of reach” in which the effect of establishing reach is not executed. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "non-reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern ("normal reach out of", "normal reach out of reach") accompanied by a reach effect when the fluctuation display result is "out of reach". It is shorter than the variable display period (20 to 70 seconds) of "super reach A off", "super reach B off", and "super reach C off").

[For small hits] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for judgment of the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern of the "special fluctuation small hit". There is.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the special fluctuation (“special fluctuation small hit”, “special fluctuation big hit”), after the fluctuation display is started, the effect image of the special mode is displayed without using the decorative pattern. As a result, a special variation effect for notifying whether the player has won either a small hit or a big hit is executed, and the final display result is notified after the special variation effect is completed. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern of the "special fluctuation small hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the "special fluctuation big hit" have a common effect until the final display result is notified.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined to be a variation pattern accompanied by a special variation (“special variation small hit”, “special variation big hit”) is 15 seconds. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with special fluctuations (“special fluctuation small hit”, “special fluctuation big hit”) is a fluctuation of “non-reach out of reach” without reach effect (reach state is not established). The fluctuation display period (12 seconds) when it is determined to be a pattern is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 seconds), and the fluctuation pattern with reach effect (reach state is established) ("normal reach out", "super reach A out", "super reach" Shorter than the variable display period (20 to 70 seconds) of "B off", "Super reach C off", "Normal reach big hit", "Super reach A big hit", "Super reach B big hit", "Super reach C big hit") It has become.

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot", and "super" For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of "reach C jackpot", a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later after the reach state is established. It will be fixedly stopped.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined that the variation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” or “normal reach jackpot”) is 20 seconds. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”) is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with special fluctuation (“special fluctuation small hit”, “special fluctuation jackpot”). The fluctuation display period is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 to 15 seconds) when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out of reach" without reach effect (reach state is not established). Fluctuations of fluctuation patterns with reach ("Super Reach A Big Hit", "Super Reach A Big Hit", "Super Reach B Missing", "Super Reach B Big Hit", "Super Reach C Missing", "Super Reach C Big Hit") It is shorter than the display period (50 to 70 seconds).

In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach (“super reach A miss”, “super reach A jackpot”, “super reach B miss”, “super reach B jackpot”, “super reach C miss”, “super reach” In "C jackpot"), after the reach state is established, as a super reach effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the ally character and the enemy character have won the jackpot by performing a battle, and the battle effect is performed. After the end, the final display result is fixed and stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by Super Reach A (“Super Reach A Off” and “Super Reach A Big Hit”), as a super reach effect, a big hit is won by a battle between a friendly character and an enemy A character. A battle A effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is being performed. Also, in the fluctuation pattern with Super Reach B ("Super Reach B Off" and "Super Reach B Big Hit"), as a super reach effect, is the big hit won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy B character? A battle B effect is executed to notify whether or not. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by Super Reach C ("Super Reach C Off" and "Super Reach C Big Hit"), as a super reach effect, is the big hit won by the battle between the ally character and the enemy C character? A battle C effect is executed to notify whether or not.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach A (“super reach A off” and “super reach A jackpot”) is 50 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach B is The fluctuation display period when it is determined as ("Super Reach B Missing" and "Super Reach B Big Hit") is 60 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern accompanied by Super Reach C ("Super Reach C Missing" and "Super Reach C"). The variable display period when it is determined as "big hit") is 70 seconds.

Fluctuation patterns with super reach ("Super reach A miss", "Super reach A jackpot", "Super reach B miss", "Super reach B jackpot", "Super reach C miss", "Super reach C jackpot") The fluctuation display period when it is determined is determined to be a fluctuation pattern without super reach ("non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "normal reach jackpot", "special fluctuation small hit", "special fluctuation jackpot"). It is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 to 20 seconds) of any of the fluctuation patterns in the case of.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the [for off (with time reduction) / off (without time reduction)] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3. Of 1 to 997, 1 to 897 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern, 898 to 977 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern, and 978 to 987 are assigned to the "super out of reach" fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of reach A", 988 to 994 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach B", and 995 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "out of super reach C". ing.

Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 897 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 898 to 977 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 978 to 987 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A out of", 988 to 994 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B out of", and 995 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach C out of". Has been done. In this way, when the display result is "off (with time reduction)" or "off (without time reduction)", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the [for small hit] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation small hit".

Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation small hit". As described above, when the display result is "small hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (C), in the [for jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 50 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", 51 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 101 to 297 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A jackpot". 298 to 597 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot", and 598 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach C jackpot".

Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "special fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern, 51 to 100 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 101 to 297 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot", 298 to 597 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot", and 598 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach C jackpot". Has been done. In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(Layer structure)
FIG. 9-4 (A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5, and FIG. 9-4 (B) shows the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5. It is explanatory drawing. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), the layer structure is composed of four types of layers: a first layer, a second layer, a third layer, and a fourth layer. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the first layer is displayed on the frontmost layer, the second layer is displayed on one layer behind the first layer, and the third layer is 1 of the second layer. The fourth layer is displayed on one back surface of the third layer, that is, on the backmost layer. Therefore, as the display priority of the layer, the display priority of the first layer is the highest, the display priority is the lowest in the order of the second layer and the third layer, and the display priority of the fourth layer is the lowest. It has become. That is, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer. The information displayed in the predetermined display area of the layer having a high display priority has higher visibility than the information displayed in the predetermined display area of the layer having a low display priority (displayed in front of the player). It looks like it is).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), a small symbol and a value of the number of reserved storages (value of the first reserved storage number, a value of the second reserved storage number) described later are displayed on the first layer. To. On the second layer, a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 and second blackout image 25TM300B2) when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, which will be described later, and a flame effect image 25TM300F when the connection zone effect is executed, which will be described later, are displayed. Will be done. In the third layer, the hold display of the hold display area 25TM011, the active display of the active display area 25TM013, the decorative symbols of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the comment image at the time of executing the comment notice effect described later are displayed. A background image (normal background image 25TM200A, special background image 25TM200B) described later is displayed on the fourth layer.

In the following description, when a predetermined image is arranged on the nth layer, the predetermined image may be referred to as a “predetermined image [nth layer]”. For example, when a decorative design as a predetermined image is arranged on the third layer, the decorative design is referred to as a "decorative design [third layer]".

A layer structure having a different display priority may be provided for the specific layer. For example, as described above, a decorative pattern, a corresponding display (hold display, active display), a mini character, and a comment image can be arranged on the third layer. Here, the third layer is composed of a third layer, a third layer, and a third layer, and a decorative pattern is arranged on the third layer, and the third layer is formed. Corresponding display (hold display, active display) may be arranged on the two layers, and the mini character and the comment image may be arranged on the third and third layers. In this case, it is assumed that the display priority is higher in the order of the 3rd-3rd layer <3rd-2nd layer <3-1st layer.

(Blackout production at the time of winning)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect blackout effect at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning blackout effect is a notice effect that is immediately executed based on the decision to execute the winning blackout effect at the time of starting winning. When the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and then the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire area.

In the present embodiment, the determination process at the time of starting winning is performed based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the command at the time of starting winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. Then, since the effect control CPU 120 executes the blackout effect at the time of winning based on the command at the time of the start winning, the execution timing of the blackout effect at the time of winning is immediately after the occurrence of the start winning (the establishment of the starting condition). This is the timing within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second (100 ms)) after the start winning prize is generated (the start condition is satisfied). For the player, it is felt that the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed at the timing when the start winning is generated (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied). Therefore, the timing at which the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed is the starting prize. It can be said that this is the timing when the start condition is satisfied.

Specifically, in the blackout effect at the time of winning, a blackout image (first black) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing of the starting winning, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. By displaying the out image 25TM300B1 and the second blackout image 25TM300B2), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) becomes a big hit. Suggest. The blackout effect at the time of winning in this case is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

In the present embodiment, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is started based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning, the blackout effect at the time of winning is a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (at the target of the blackout effect at the time of winning). It shall be continuously executed until the timing when a certain fluctuation display) is started.

In the present embodiment, the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is a blackout image displayed at the timing when the blackout effect at the time of winning is started, and is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. It is a covered image in a mode reminiscent of the sudden disappearance of the effect image (decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer], background image [fourth layer], etc.). ..

The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is a blackout image displayed at a timing after the display of the first blackout image, and is an effect image displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. It is a covering image of a mode reminiscent that the decorative pattern [third layer], background image [fourth layer], etc.) is continuously disappeared. That is, the first blackout image is an image that notifies that the blackout effect at the time of winning has been started, and the second blackout image is an image that the blackout effect at the time of winning is continuously executed. It is an image to be notified.

In the present embodiment, a background image is displayed by displaying a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1, second blackout image 25TM300B2) [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. The visibility of the [fourth layer], the decorative design [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see. That is, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, the difficult-to-see state of the background image [4th layer] is continued, the difficult-to-see state of the decorative pattern [3rd layer] is also continued, and the corresponding display (hold display, hold display, Active display) The difficult-to-see state of [third layer] will continue.

Here, due to the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] are continuously in a difficult-to-see state. , The value of the number of reserved storages [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer], which will be described later, remain visible. That is, it was displayed in the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] displayed as the background image, the decorative symbol [third layer] variablely displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode and the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode displayed in the active display area 25TM013 is reduced, the first hold storage number display is displayed. It fluctuates in "2" [first layer] displayed in the area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. The visibility of the displayed small symbols [first layer] is not deteriorated (see FIG. 9-5).

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs variation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs variation display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the special symbol (in parallel), and the variation of the small symbol corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol (in parallel). The display is running.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the value of the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number display area of the image display device 5. The value of the second reserved storage number is displayed on 25TM025.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the winning blackout effect (that is, the timing at which the first blackout image is displayed), the speakers 8L and 8R are used to notify the execution of the winning blackout effect (that is, the sound (that is, the timing at which the first blackout image is displayed)). A blackout sound effect effect that reproduces and outputs the sound effect) is executed, and then a mute effect that does not reproduce and output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is being executed, the game effect lamp 9, which is an effect device different from the light emitting body 25TM100, is turned off.

(Connection zone production)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the connection zone effect after the end of the blackout effect at the time of winning, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The connection zone effect is composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect.

The first effect in the connection zone effect is the timing at which the blackout effect at the time of winning ends (that is, the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display that is the target of the blackout effect at the time of winning) starts). , The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is erased from the image display device 5, and the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the characters "Battle ZONE" as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 It is a notice effect to display [Layer].

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 represents a volcanic landscape including a night sky, mountains, smoke, and the characters "Battle ZONE" as a background image when the first effect in the connection zone effect is executed. The control for arranging the special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] on the 4th layer is being executed. At this time, the characters "Battle ZONE" are displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Since the control for arranging the including flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] on the second layer is also executed and displayed, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Further, the second effect in the connection zone effect means that the flame effect image 25TM300F is erased from the image display device 5 after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the first effect, and a predetermined timing (this). A special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] showing the scenery of the volcano including the night sky, mountains, eruption, and the characters "Battle ZONE" as the background image of the decorative pattern until the timing of development into super reach in the example). It is a notice production that makes the display visible. That is, when the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] is executed with the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] visible. ..

In the present embodiment, when the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed, a special background image showing the landscape of the volcano including the night sky, the mountains, the eruption of smoke, and the characters "Battle ZONE" is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. 25TM200B [4th layer] is displayed. At this time, when the first effect is completed, the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], which is a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, is erased, so that the special background image 25TM200B [th. 4 layers] are visible.

In the present embodiment, the connection zone effect is an effect that is always executed when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, and develops into a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit (battle B effect or battle C effect). It is a production that confirms that either one will be executed). That is, determining whether or not the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning corresponds to determining whether or not the connection zone effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection zone effect is always executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this form, and the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed after the blackout effect is executed. A pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed and a pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed may be provided. Then, if the effect is executed by the pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the effect is executed by the pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher than when it is done (the rate at which either the battle B effect or the battle C effect is executed is higher).

Specifically, as for the connection zone effect accompanying the blackout effect at the time of winning, the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variation display which is the target of the connection zone effect accompanying the blackout effect at the time of winning) was started after the start winning. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing, the variation display suggesting the display result of the executed variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied) is being changed. It is executed as a notice production.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the background image [fourth layer] and the decorative pattern [ The visibility of the [third layer] and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see. That is, by executing the first effect in the connection zone effect after the blackout effect at the time of winning, the difficult-to-see state of the background image [fourth layer] is continued, and the difficult-to-see state of the decorative pattern [third layer] is also present. It will be continued, and the difficult-to-see state of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] will also be continued.

Here, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] are continuously displayed by the connection zone effect after the blackout effect at the time of winning. Although it becomes difficult to see, the value of the number of reserved memories [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] remain visible. That is, it was displayed in the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] displayed as the background image, the decorative symbol [third layer] variablely displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode and the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode displayed in the active display area 25TM013 is reduced, the first hold storage number display is displayed. "0" [1st layer] displayed in the area 25TM015, "0" [1st layer] displayed in the 2nd reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and variations in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r. The visibility of the displayed small symbols [first layer] is not deteriorated.

(Example of blackout production and connection zone production at the time of winning)
FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a winning blackout effect and a connection zone effect displayed on the image display device 5. 9-5 (1) to (6) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect. -5 (7) and (8) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the connection zone effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 decorates the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol [third layer] is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of a decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one hold display 25TM001 [third layer] of the normal mode is displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol [third layer] is being executed, a new start is made. It is assumed that a prize has been generated and the number of first reserved memories is 2. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 executes a winning blackout effect based on a command at the time of starting winning (determination result at the time of starting winning), and first blackout image as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 25TM300B1 [2nd layer] is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer, and the hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011. Based on the fact that one [third layer] is continuously arranged and a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased is received, the reserved display 25TM001 in the normal mode is stored in the first reserved display area 25TM0011. Is newly placed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so that the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display). , Active display) The visibility of the [third layer] has deteriorated, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer, so that the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. Even if the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed as, "2" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [third] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. The visibility of [1 layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image of the second layer on the first black after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the blackout effect at the time of winning. The out image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is changed to the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the blackout effect at the time of winning, and serves as a covered image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 2 The blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the decorative symbols [third layer] (“243” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the third layer, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011 [. The third layer] is arranged in succession. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of a decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so that the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display). , Active display) The visibility of the [third layer] has deteriorated, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the small symbols [first layer] (“243” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer, so that the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as, "2" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [third] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. The visibility of [1 layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the image display device. The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Let me. Further, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1 in the third layer, and holds the display. The hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the area 25TM011 is shifted one by one to the active display area 25TM013 side. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so that the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display). , Active display) The visibility of the [third layer] has deteriorated, making it difficult to see.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first hold storage number of 1, "1" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer, so that the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as, "1" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [third] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. The visibility of [1 layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the image display device. The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“134” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the third layer, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011 [. The third layer] is continuously arranged. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so that the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display). , Active display) The visibility of the [third layer] has deteriorated, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the small symbols [first layer] (“134” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer, so that the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as, "1" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [third] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. The visibility of [1 layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 ends the blackout effect at the time of winning and executes the connection zone effect. To do. Specifically, the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is erased, and the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the characters "Battle ZONE" as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Layer] is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Let me. Further, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0 in the third layer, and holds the display. The hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the area 25TM011 is erased. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 represents the landscape of the volcano including the night sky, mountains, eruption, and the characters "Battle ZONE" from the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer] as the background image arranged in the 4th layer. The special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] is changed.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so that the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] as the covering image, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [ The visibility of the third layer] has deteriorated, making it difficult to see.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the first hold storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer, so that the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. Even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed as, "0" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. ], And the visibility of the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (7), at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuously executing the connection zone effect, and the image display device. The flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased from 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, none of the covering images is displayed on the second layer, which has a higher display priority than the fourth layer and the third layer, so that the background image is special. The visibility of the background image 25TM200B [fourth layer], the decorative design [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [third layer] is improved and is in a visible state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased, "0" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 and the second reserved storage are stored. The visibility of "0" [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] of the number display area 25TM025 is not deteriorated.

(Flash production at the time of winning)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning flash effect is a notice effect that causes the illuminant 25TM100 to emit light based on the decision to execute the winning flash effect at the time of starting winning.

In the present embodiment, the determination process at the time of starting winning is performed based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and the command at the time of starting winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. Then, since the effect control CPU 120 executes the flash effect at the time of winning based on the command at the time of the start winning, the execution timing of the flash effect at the time of winning is immediately after the occurrence of the start winning (the establishment of the start condition). , The timing is within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second (100 ms)) after the start winning is generated (the start condition is satisfied). For the player, it is felt that the flash effect at the time of winning is executed at the timing when the start prize is generated (the timing when the start condition is satisfied), so that the start prize occurs at the timing when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. It can be said that it is the timing (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied).

Specifically, the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (starting condition is satisfied) by causing the light emitter 25TM100 to emit light at the timing of the starting winning based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning. However, it may suggest that the display result of (variable display) for which the start condition is not satisfied is a big hit. The flash effect at the time of winning in this case is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

Further, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed by causing the illuminant 25TM100 to emit light at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the start winning (variation display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning) is started after the start winning. It may be executed as a notice effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). The flash effect at the time of winning in this case is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, when the flash effect at the time of winning is started based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). ) Is continuously executed until a predetermined timing (in this example, the timing at which reach is established).

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash sound effect effect for reproducing and outputting the sound effect (flash sound effect, etc.) for notifying the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed by using the speakers 8L and 8R. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the emission color of the light emitting body 25TM100, which is a light emitting device, is different. When it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in the start winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning is either "white light emitting mode" or "red light emitting mode". Will be decided.

The effect control CPU 120 blinks the light emitter 25TM100 in white at the timing of the start winning in the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode. Then, from the timing of the start winning to the timing of the super reach development in the variation display corresponding to the start winning (the variation display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the light emitter 25TM100 is continuously controlled to blink in white. To do. Further, in the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, at the start of the winning flash effect, the light emitting sound effect A is reproduced and output once as a sound effect for notifying the execution of the winning flash effect using the speakers 8L and 8R. Shall be.

The effect control CPU 120 blinks the light emitter 25TM100 in red at the timing of the start winning in the flash effect at the time of winning in the red light emitting mode. Then, from the timing of the start winning to the timing of the super reach development in the variation display corresponding to the start winning (the variation display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the light emitter 25TM100 is continuously controlled to blink in red. To do. Further, in the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode, at the start of the winning flash effect, the light emitting sound effect B is reproduced and output once as a sound effect for notifying the execution of the winning flash effect using the speakers 8L and 8R. Shall be.

As described above, the emission color of the illuminant 25TM100 is different between the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode (white in the white light emitting mode and red in the red light emitting mode). In the present embodiment, the blinking interval of the light emitting body 25TM100 (the ON / OFF interval of the light emission of the light emitting body 25TM100) is common between the white light emitting mode winning flash effect and the red light emitting mode winning flash effect. However, the flashing interval of the light emitter 25TM100 may be different between the winning flash effect of the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect of the red light emitting mode, and the flashing of the white light emitting mode is different. The blinking interval may be shorter (the light emission cycle is shorter) in the winning flash effect in the red light emission mode than in the effect.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting sound effect is output only once at the timing when the flash effect at the time of winning is started (the timing of starting winning), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and at the time of winning. The light emission sound effect is output not only at the timing when the flash effect is started but also at a predetermined timing during the period when the flash effect is executed at the time of winning (for example, the timing when the fluctuation display including the fluctuation display of the target is started). You may do so.

(Chance eye production)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance eye effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The chance eye effect is an enlarged mode in which the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is either (a) a combination of even-numbered symbols or (b) a combination of odd-numbered symbols, and the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed. It is a notice effect that stops and displays the decorative design in the display mode.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the chance eye effect at the time of the start winning in the state where the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, (i) the following of the variation display executed at the time of the start winning. From the variation display to (ii) the variation display immediately before the variation display that is the target of the notice of the chance eye production, the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in each of the variation displays of (i) and (ii) , Even-numbered symbol combinations (for example, "246", "468", etc.) or odd-numbered symbol combinations (for example, "135", "357", etc.), so that the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize (for example, "135", "357", etc.) It may be suggested that the display result of (variable display) in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is a big hit. The chance eye effect in this case is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

Further, when it is decided to execute the chance eye effect at the time of starting winning while the number of reserved memories is 0, (iii) the variable display which is the target of the advance notice of the chance eye effect is described above. After temporarily stopping the combination of even-numbered or odd-numbered decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a re-variable manner (that is, the operation is similar to the pseudo-continuous effect), so that the variable display (start condition is) is being executed. It may suggest that the display result of the established variable display) is a big hit. The chance eye effect in this case is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the chance eye effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop) is different. When it is decided to execute the chance eye effect in the start winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the chance eye effect is determined to be either an "even number mode" or an "odd number mode". (See FIG. 9-9 (C)).

In the variation display after the variation display in which the even-numbered chance eye effect is executed, the odd-numbered chance eye effect may be executed. In this case, the expectation of a big hit may be higher than in the case where the odd-numbered chance-eye effect is executed without the even-numbered chance-eye effect being executed.

(Change production)
In the present embodiment, the change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is a special mode (in this example, a white circle display in this example) in which the hold display 25TM001 or the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is displayed. , White triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), or red mode (red circle display in this example).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect that displays the display mode of 25TM001 of the hold display in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode) It is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that has not been executed (the variable display that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). Further, among the change effects, an active change effect for displaying the display mode of the active display 25TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode) is executed. It is a notice effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the change effect is executed and the change pattern of the hold display will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12 described later.

(Comment notice production)
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the comment notice effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The comment notice effect is a display result of a variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) corresponding to the start prize, together with the mini character, in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which a suggestive comment image is displayed.

Specifically, when it is decided to execute the comment notice effect at the time of the start winning, (i) from the next variation display of the change display executed at the time of the start prize, (ii) the comment notice effect. A comment image is displayed together with the mini character at the start of each of the variation displays (i) to (ii) up to the variation display immediately before the variation display that is the target of the advance notice. It is suggested that the display result of the variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) corresponding to the start prize is a big hit by such an effect mode. This comment notice effect is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

In the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the comment notice effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the characters displayed on the comment image are different. In the start winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the comment notice effect is determined to be one of the "first aspect" and the "second aspect" (see FIG. 9-10). In the comment notice effect of the first aspect, the mini character and the first comment image (comment image showing the characters "next, chance?") Are displayed, and in the comment notice effect of the second aspect, the mini character and the second comment image are displayed. A comment image (a comment image showing the characters "Next, expectation!") Is displayed.

In this comment notice effect, when the comment image is displayed, the character voice sound corresponding to the characters shown in the comment image may be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the comment notice effect of the first aspect is executed, the mini character and the first comment image (comment image showing the characters "next, chance?") Are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the character voice sound of "Next, chance?" May be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<First Embodiment>
[Production decision processing at the time of starting prize]
9-6 and 9-7 are the first embodiments of the flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. In the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect determination process at the start of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7. Execute.

In the effect determination process at the time of the start prize of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of commands at the time of the start prize (for example, a symbol designation command) based on the occurrence of the start prize at the first start prize opening. , The variable category command, and the first hold storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S25TM1000).

The symbol designation command indicates the judgment result of whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and whether or not it is a miss (with a shortened time) among the judgment results at the time of winning, and when it is judged as a big hit. This is an effect control command that indicates the judgment result of the jackpot type of, and the judgment result of the time saving type when it is judged to be out of order (with time saving).

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and whether it is a small hit or not, based on the random number for determining the big hit extracted at the time of starting winning. As shown in Fig. 8-4 and Fig. 8-5, it is determined whether or not it becomes a big hit, and based on the type judgment random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the big hit type in the case of a big hit, the loss (time reduction) (Attachment) is determined, and the symbol specification command that specifies the determination result is output. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal reach is achieved, whether or not the super reach is achieved, and the like based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. judge. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S25TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received (YES in step S25TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 is set with any of the look-ahead prohibition flag described later, the specific flag described later, or the predetermined flag described later. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (step S25TM1010). If any of the read-ahead prohibition flag, the specific flag, and the predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the process ends as it is. That is, when the read-ahead prohibition flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the processing in step S25TM1020 or less is skipped, and when the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), step S25TM1020 or less. If the processing is skipped and the predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the processing in step S25TM1020 and below is skipped.

When none of the read-ahead prohibition flag, the specific flag, and the predetermined flag is set (NO in step S25TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold storage information corresponding to the start winning prize prior to the start winning prize. It is determined whether or not the results (judgment results at the time of starting winning) are all "missing (no time saving)" and the display result of the variable display during execution is "missing (no time saving)" (step). S25TM1020).

Whether any of the display results of the hold storage information (judgment result at the time of the start prize) corresponding to the start prize before the start prize is "missing (no time reduction)", or the display result of the variable display during execution If is not "off (no time reduction)" (NO in step S25TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1230.

The display result of the hold storage information (judgment result at the time of the start prize) corresponding to the start prize before the start prize is "missing (no time reduction)", and the display result of the variable display during execution is If it is "out of time (no time reduction)" (YES in step S25TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timing at which the start winning is generated is the symbol stop period or the symbol determination period in the variable display during execution. , It is determined which period is not (step S25TM1030).

(Symbol suspension period, symbol confirmation period)
In the present embodiment, as shown in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 8-24 described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804). The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Then, as shown in the effect processing during variable display of FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26 described above, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 078IWS841) and sets the variable time timer to 1. Subtract (step S078IWS842).

In the present embodiment, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols based on the display control execution data and notifies the display result to the timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received and the symbol confirmation period is entered. The period of is the symbol suspension period. In the symbol stop period, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (swinging stop) to notify the display result of the fluctuation, and also to notify that the fluctuation display has not been completed yet. Further, in the present embodiment, a period in which the symbol suspension period and the symbol confirmation period are combined is referred to as a specific period.

FIG. 9-8 is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop period and the symbol determination period in each fluctuation pattern when the display result is “off (no time reduction)”. FIG. 9-8 (A) shows the symbol stop period and the symbol determination when the fluctuation pattern becomes either "non-reach out of reach" or "normal reach out of order" when the display result is "out of time (no time reduction)". It is a timing chart for explaining a period. Further, in FIG. 9-8 (B), when the display result is "off (no time reduction)", the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach ("super reach A off", "super reach B off", Or, it is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period when either of them becomes "Super Reach C off").

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), when the display result is "out of reach (no time reduction)" and the fluctuation pattern is either "out of reach" or "out of normal reach", it is for effect control. The CPU 120 subtracts the value of the fluctuation time timer by 1 as the fluctuation display progresses after starting the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and decorates the decoration at the timing 0.5 seconds before the time-out of the fluctuation time timer (timing of T1A). Stop and display the design. The timing of this T1A is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, when the fluctuation time timer times out and the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms and stops the decorative symbol (timing of T2A). The timing of this T2A is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the symbol confirmation period at a timing (T3A timing) 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (after the fluctuation time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "out of reach (no time reduction)" and the fluctuation pattern is either "out of reach" or "out of normal reach", the period from the timing of T1A to the timing of T3A is a specific period. (0.5 + 0.5 = 1 second).

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), when the display result is "off (no time reduction)", the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach ("super reach A off", "super reach B off"". , Or "Super Reach C is out"), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol, and then subtracts the value of the variation time timer by 1 as the variation display progresses, and the variation is performed. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (T1B timing) 2 seconds before the time timer times out. The timing of this T1B is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, when the fluctuation time timer times out and the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms and stops the decorative symbol (T2B timing). The timing of this T2B is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the symbol confirmation period at a timing (T3B timing) 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (after the fluctuation time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "off (no time reduction)", the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with super reach ("super reach A off", "super reach B off", or "super reach C off"). When either of them is obtained, the period from the timing of T1B to the timing of T3B is set as a specific period (2 + 0.5 = 2.5 seconds).

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern becomes either "non-reach out" or "normal reach out", the symbol stop period is 0.5 seconds (the period from T1A to T2A). On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern becomes any of the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach (“super reach A off”, “super reach B off”, or “super reach C off”), the symbol stop period is 2 seconds (T1B). ~ T2B period). Therefore, the symbol suspension period is a period that differs depending on the fluctuation pattern.

When the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach out" or "normal reach out", the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds (the period from T2A to T3A). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern becomes any of the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach (“super reach A off”, “super reach B off”, or “super reach C off”), the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds ( The period from T2B to T3B). Therefore, the symbol determination period is a fixed period regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

When the timing at which the start winning is generated is the symbol stop period or the symbol determination period in the variable display during execution (that is, when it is a specific period) (YES in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step S25TM1090. Proceed to processing.

When the timing at which the start prize is generated is not the symbol stop period in the variable display during execution and is not the symbol confirmation period (that is, it is not a specific period) (NO in step S25TM1030), it is for effect control. In the CPU 120, the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation category command is a fluctuation pattern in which either Super Reach B or Super Reach C is involved (“Super Reach B Off”, “Super Reach”. It is determined whether or not the game is "B jackpot", "super reach C missed", or "super reach C jackpot") (step S25TM1040).

It is not a fluctuation pattern with either Super Reach B or Super Reach C (whether the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach B Missing", "Super Reach B Big Hit", "Super Reach C Missing", or "Super Reach C Big Hit". If not (NO in step S25TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1090.

It is a fluctuation pattern with either Super Reach B or Super Reach C (whether the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach B out of order", "Super Reach B jackpot", "Super Reach C out of order", or "Super Reach C jackpot". In that case (YES in step S25TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, and a table for determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (FIG. 9-9 (FIG. 9-9). A) Determined based on).

(Table for determining whether to execute blackout production at the time of winning)
FIG. 9-9 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution determination table of the blackout effect at the time of winning. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the blackout effect at the time of winning differs depending on the display result.

The effect control CPU 120 is 99 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, when the judging result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). It is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning at a rate of%, and it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning at a rate of 1%.

The effect control CPU 120 is 100 when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"). It is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning at the rate of%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 is blacked out at the time of winning at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute the production, and it is decided to execute the blackout production at the time of winning at a rate of 60%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 is at a rate of 100% at the time of winning. Decide not to perform a blackout effect.

In this way, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (with time saving)" or "small hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)" or "small". In the case of "hit"), it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)" or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)" or "big hit". In either case), it is decided to perform a blackout effect at the time of winning at a rate of 1 to 60%. Therefore, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, it is determined that the display result is "missing (no time reduction)" or "big hit".

Even when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the judgment value may be assigned so that the blackout effect at the time of winning can be executed. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is either "missing (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the ratio is higher than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time reduction)". The blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at the time of winning, and the blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a lower rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time reduction)". May be good. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is either "missing (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" at a lower rate than when winning black. The out effect may be executed, or the blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit". For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is either "missing (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the ratio is higher than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time reduction)". Therefore, the blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a lower rate than the case where the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the winning blackout effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the winning blackout effect is not executed.

When the process of step S25TM1050 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (step S25TM1060). If it is determined not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (NO in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1090.

If it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter described later (step S25TM1070), and sets the specific flag described later. (Step S25TM1080), and the process proceeds to step S25TM1090.

The value corresponding to the first hold storage number updated based on the start winning (value specified by the first hold storage number designation command) is set in the first look-ahead counter, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed. Each time it is executed (every time the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the first look-ahead counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the hold display 25TM001 corresponding to the hold memory that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the first look-ahead counter becomes 0, the targeted variation display is executed. The second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter, which will be described later, are also subtracted in the same manner as the first look-ahead counter.

During the period when the specific flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, a prize corresponding to the new start prize (new first hold memory) is obtained by determining YES in step S25TM1010 described above. When blackout production is not performed. The specific flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the blackout effect at the time of winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation category command is "non-reach out" (step S25TM1090). When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S25TM1090), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1140.

When the variation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S25TM1090), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the flash effect is executed at the time of winning and the effect mode, and whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and the effect mode. (See FIG. 9-9 (B)) for determination (step S25TM1100).

(Presence / absence of flash production at the time of winning and production mode determination table)
FIG. 9-9 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of whether or not the flash effect is executed at the time of winning and the effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the flash effect at the time of winning is different depending on the display result.

The effect control CPU 120 is 90 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, when the judging result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). It was decided not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of%, and it was decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning of the white light emitting mode at a rate of 8%, and the flash effect at the time of winning of the red light emitting mode at a rate of 2%. Decide to do.

The effect control CPU 120 is 90 when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"). It is decided not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of%, and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning of the white light emitting mode at a rate of 10%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 flashes at the time of winning at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in the red light emitting mode at a rate of 50%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 is at a rate of 100% at the time of winning. Decide not to perform the flash effect.

In this way, when the judgment result at the start winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the flash effect at the time of winning is 100%. Decided not to run. On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (that is)". In the case of "no time reduction", "missing (with time reduction)", or "big hit"), it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of 10 to 70%. Therefore, at the time when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the display result is one of the display results other than "small hit" ("missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit". Result) is confirmed.

Even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be assigned so that the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), when the winning flash effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode <the flash effect at the time of winning in the red light emitting mode.

When the process of step S25TM1100 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step S25TM1110). If it is determined not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (NO in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1140.

If it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S25TM1120) and sets a predetermined flag described later (step S25TM1120). S25TM1130), the process proceeds to step S25TM1140.

During the period when the predetermined flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, a prize corresponding to the new start prize (new first hold memory) is obtained by determining YES in step S25TM1010 described above. When flash effect is not performed. The predetermined flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is completed.

Next, in the effect control CPU 120, the fluctuation patterns of the reserved storage information corresponding to the start prizes prior to the start prizes are all "non-reach out", and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation display during execution are "non-reach". It is determined whether or not the product is "out of reach" (step S25TM1140). If any of the fluctuation patterns of the reserved storage information corresponding to the start prize prior to the start prize is not "non-reach out", or the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display during execution is not "non-reach out of reach". (NO in step S25TM1140), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1230.

When the fluctuation pattern of the reserved storage information corresponding to the start prize prior to the start prize is "non-reach out of reach" and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display during execution is "non-reach out of reach". (YES in step S25TM1140), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance eye effect is executed and the effect mode based on the table for determining whether or not the chance eye effect is executed and the effect mode (step S25TM1150).

(Presence / absence of execution of chance eye production and production mode determination table)
FIG. 9-9 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution of the chance eye effect and the effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the chance eye effect differs depending on the display result.

The effect control CPU 120 is 95 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, when the judging result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). It was decided not to execute the chance eye effect at a rate of%, decided to execute the chance eye effect of the even number mode at the rate of 4%, and to execute the chance eye effect of the odd number mode at the rate of 1%. decide.

The effect control CPU 120 is 92 when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"). It was decided not to execute the chance eye effect at a rate of%, decided to execute the chance eye effect of the even number mode at the rate of 6%, and to execute the chance eye effect of the even number mode at the rate of 2%. decide.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 produces a chance eye effect at a rate of 85%. It is decided not to execute, it is decided to execute the even-numbered chance-eye effect at a rate of 8%, and it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance-eye effect at a rate of 7%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 has a 100% chance. Decide not to perform the production.

In this way, when the judgment result at the start winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the chance eye effect is produced at a rate of 100%. I have decided not to do it. On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (that is)". In the case of "no time reduction", "missing (with time reduction)", or "big hit"), it is decided to execute the chance eye production at a rate of 5 to 15%. Therefore, at the time when the chance eye effect is executed, the display result is one of the display results other than "small hit" ("missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit". ) Is confirmed.

Even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be assigned so that the chance eye effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), when the chance-eye effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the chance-eye effect is not executed. Further, when the chance-eye effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of the even-numbered chance-eye effect <the odd-numbered chance-eye effect.

When the process of step S25TM1150 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1160). If it is determined not to execute the chance eye effect (NO in step S25TM1160), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1185.

When it is decided to execute the chance eye effect (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets the third look-ahead counter (step S25TM1170), and sets the look-ahead prohibition flag described later (step). S25TM1180), the process proceeds to step S25TM1185.

During the period when the look-ahead prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S25TM1010 described above. The chance eye production is not executed. The look-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the chance eye effect is completed.

The look-ahead prohibition flag is also set when it is decided to execute the comment notice effect (YES in step S25TM1200) or when it is decided to execute the change effect (YES in step S25TM1240). To. Similar to the case where it is decided to execute the chance eye effect for this look-ahead prohibition flag, even if a new start winning prize occurs during the period when the look-ahead prohibition flag is set, YES is set in step S25TM1010 described above. If it is determined, the comment notice effect and the change effect corresponding to the new start winning prize (new first hold memory) are not executed. The look-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the comment notice effect or the change effect ends.

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has an updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number including the hold memory corresponding to the start prize) based on the occurrence of the start prize is 2 or more. Is determined (step S25TM1185). If the updated first hold storage number (the first hold storage number including the hold memory corresponding to the start prize) based on the occurrence of the start prize is less than 2 (NO in step S25TM1185), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1230.

When the updated first hold storage number (the first hold storage number including the hold memory corresponding to the start prize) based on the occurrence of the start prize is 2 or more (YES in step S25TM1185), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the comment advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode based on a table (see FIG. 9-10) for determining whether or not the comment notice effect is executed and the effect mode (step S25TM1190). That is, when the updated first hold storage number (the first hold storage number including the hold memory corresponding to the start prize) based on the occurrence of the start prize is 2 or more, the comment notice effect is executed. The presence / absence is determined, but if it is 0 or 1, the presence / absence of execution of the comment notice effect is not determined (the comment notice effect cannot be executed).

Not limited to such a form, it is the first hold storage number (the first hold including the hold memory corresponding to the start winning prize) that determines whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (the process of step S25TM1190 is executed). The number of memories) may be 3 or more, or 4 or more.

(Execution / non-execution of comment notice production and production mode determination table)
FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of whether or not the comment notice effect is executed and the effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-10, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the comment notice effect differs depending on the display result.

The effect control CPU 120 80 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, when the judging result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). It was decided not to execute the comment notice effect at a rate of%, it was decided to execute the comment notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 18%, and the comment notice effect of the second aspect was executed at a rate of 2%. Decide on that.

The effect control CPU 120 is 75 when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"). It was decided not to execute the comment notice effect at a rate of%, it was decided to execute the comment notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 20%, and the comment notice effect of the second aspect was executed at a rate of 5%. Decide on that.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 gives a comment notice effect at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to execute, it is decided to execute the comment notice effect of the first aspect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute the comment notice effect of the second aspect at a rate of 30%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 gives a comment notice at a rate of 100%. Decide not to perform the production.

In this way, when the judgment result at the start winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the comment notice effect is given at a rate of 100%. I have decided not to do it. On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (that is)". In the case of "no time reduction", "missing (with time reduction)", or "big hit"), it has been decided to execute the comment notice effect at a rate of 20 to 40%. Therefore, at the time when the comment notice effect is executed, the display result is any of the display results other than "small hit" ("missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit". ) Is confirmed.

Even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be assigned so that the comment notice effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-10, when the comment notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the comment notice effect is not executed. Further, when the comment notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of the comment notice effect of the first aspect <the comment notice effect of the second aspect.

When the process of step S25TM1190 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1200). If it is determined not to execute the comment notice effect (NO in step S25TM1200), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1230.

When it is decided to execute the comment notice effect (YES in step S25TM1200), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fourth look-ahead counter (step S25TM1210) and sets the look-ahead prohibition flag (step S25TM1220). , Step S25TM1230 proceeds with the process.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change effect is executed and the final display mode of the active display based on a table (see FIGS. 9-11) for determining whether or not the change effect is executed and the final display mode of the active display. Determine (step S25TM1230).

(Execution / non-execution of change effect and final display mode determination table of active display)
FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution of the change effect and the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 9-11, in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 is any of "normal mode (white mode)", "special mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". It is possible to determine whether or not, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 10%. It becomes a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 15%, and a red mode (red circle display) at a rate of 5%.

If the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the starting winning (new first) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (1 hold storage) is a normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 65% and a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%. , 20% will be blue (blue circle) and 5% will be red (red circle).

When the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the variation display based on the start winning (new first hold memory) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the above is a normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 30%, a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 5%, and a blue mode at a rate of 25%. (Blue circle display), and the red mode (red circle display) at a rate of 40%.

When the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), it is based on the starting prize (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 100%.

In this way, when the judgment result at the start winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the change effect is executed at a rate of 100%. It is decided not to do so (the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 should be the normal mode (white circle display)). On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (that is)". In the case of "no time reduction", "missing (with time reduction)", or "big hit"), the change effect is executed at a rate of 30 to 70% (the final display mode of the active display 25TM003). Determined to be one of a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (red circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). ing. Therefore, when the change effect is executed, the display result is a display result other than "small hit" (display result of either "missing (no time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit"). It is confirmed that

Even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be assigned so that the change effect can be executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the active display 25TM003 is displayed in a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (blue circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). The effect displayed in red circle display) is called change effect (active change effect). Therefore, the final display mode of the active display is a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (red circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). The determination is to execute a change effect (active change effect) in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode). Corresponds to the decision.

On the other hand, determining the final display mode of the active display to the normal mode (white circle display) corresponds to determining not to execute the change effect (active change effect and hold change effect).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the change effect (step S25TM1240). If it is decided not to execute the change effect (NO in step S25TM1240), the process ends as it is.

When it is decided to execute the change effect (YES in step 07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the change effect to the change pattern determination table of the change effect (FIGS. 9-12 and 9-). It is determined based on (see step 13) (step S25TM1250), the fifth look-ahead counter is set (step S25TM1260), the look-ahead prohibition flag is set (step S25TM1270), and the process ends as it is.

(Change pattern determination table for change production)
9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of a change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing at which the nth hold display 25TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 ( (Timing at the time of starting prize), (ii) Timing when the hold display 25TM001 corresponding to the start prize shifts to a higher position (active display area 25TM013 side) in the hold display area 25TM011 (when n ≧ 2). , And (iii), at the timing when the hold display 25TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 25TM013 (the timing when the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the variable display based on the starting winning is displayed. The display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the above may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode depending on the change effect.

In FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, what kind of display mode the display information (hold display 25TM001 or active display 25TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Indicates whether it will be. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white round display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue aspect which is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red aspect which is a red round display.

([For 1 hold] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for one reserved] change effect shown in FIG. 9-12 (1). Select the change pattern determination table for.

In the description of FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the active shift means that the hold display area 25TM001 shifts from the hold display area 25TM011 to the active display area 25TM013 (as a result, it becomes a determination target at the time of starting winning. The active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 103 is the change pattern 103 at the time of the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)". ”), The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 60%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%. There is.

Further, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Here, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201 described later, change pattern 301 described later, change pattern 401 described later). In the case), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of the pattern 303, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 403), the active display 25TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 105 is the change pattern 105 at the time of the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 is at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 10%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of the pattern 303, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 403), the active display 25TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change). In the case of the pattern 305, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405), the active display 25TM003 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 is at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10%. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5% and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "ha big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 4 The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 25% and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of the pattern 303, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 403), the active display 25TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change). In the case of the pattern 304, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405), the active display 25TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 106 and change pattern 107, change pattern 206 to change pattern 208, change pattern 306 to change, which will be described later). In the case of pattern 310, change pattern 406 to change pattern 410), the active display 25TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

([For 2 hold] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for two reserved] change effect shown in FIG. 9-12 (2). Select the change pattern determination table for.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 203, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is held at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode, and the change pattern 203 displays the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is and does not change the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 60%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined and the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, and the change pattern 205, respectively. The change pattern 204 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to a blue mode. In the change pattern 205, the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the mode as it is and does not change the hold display of the advance notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 40%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 10%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 206 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 208 is the first time after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 35%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 2%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 20%.

([For 3 hold] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for three reserved] change effects shown in FIG. 9-13 (3). Select the change pattern determination table for.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 303, respectively. The change pattern 302 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode. After displaying in the special mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined and the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 304 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, and the change pattern 305 displays the hold display of the notice target at the start winning. After displaying in the blue mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, the determination values are set respectively. Allocated. The change pattern 306 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying with, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and is active. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 10%. , Change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 2%, and changes. Judgment values are assigned so that the pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. The change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 8%.

([For 4 hold] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for four reserved] change effect shown in FIG. 9-13 (4). Select the change pattern determination table for.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 403, respectively. The change pattern 402 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 403, the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in a special mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 60%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order (no time reduction), out of order (with time reduction), or big hit) Depending on the situation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405, respectively. The change pattern 404 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 405 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the hold display to be announced in the blue mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, miss (no time reduction), miss (with time reduction), or big hit) Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 401, change pattern 402, change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, and change pattern 410, respectively. It has been. The change pattern 406 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 407 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 408 displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then specializes the hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift without changing the mode, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and is active. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the shift timing, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the timing of the third hold shift is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)"). In the case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 35%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 10%. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 40%.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning can be changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the blue mode. It is possible to change from a special aspect to a red aspect. Further, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning does not change from the blue mode to any mode, and does not change from the red mode to any mode. Therefore, the special mode as the mode of the hold display is a mode suggesting that the mode changes to the red mode, and the hold display is displayed in the special mode as compared with the case where the hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Is higher in the rate of change to the red mode.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the change pattern of the change effect is determined according to the determination result (display result specified by the symbol designation command) at the time of starting winning. An example in which values are assigned is shown, but the judgment value is not limited to such a form, and the judgment value is set to the change pattern of the change effect according to the judgment result (variation pattern specified by the fluctuation category command) at the time of starting winning. It may be allocated.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the change pattern in which the hold display changes from blue to red is not provided, but the hold display is not limited to such a form. A change pattern that changes from blue to red may be provided. For example, when the number of reserved memories becomes 3 based on the start winning, the hold display corresponding to the start prize is displayed in the normal mode (or a special mode), and the hold display is usually displayed at the first hold shift. A pattern may be provided in which the mode (or special mode) changes to blue and the hold display changes from blue to red at the second hold shift. When the hold display changes from blue to red late (for example, during the second hold shift), the hold display changes from blue to red early (for example, during the first hold shift). The jackpot expectation may be higher than in the case of). On the contrary, when the hold display changes from blue to red at an early timing (for example, at the time of the first hold shift), the hold display changes from blue to red at a late timing (for example). The jackpot expectation may be higher than in the case of the second hold shift).

(Example of production when the start prize is won in a period different from the specific period)
Next, a new start prize is generated in a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from both the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period), and the prize is won in the start prize production determination process of the first embodiment. With reference to FIGS. 9-14 and 9-15, the production examples when it is decided to execute the time blackout effect, the connection zone effect, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. explain.

FIG. 9-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the blackout effect at the time of winning, the connection zone effect, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. In FIG. 9-15, an aspect of the light emitting body 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity (upper right portion) of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the effect drawing.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the winning blackout effect in step S25TM1050, and the white light emitting mode winning flash effect in step S25TM1100. Is decided to be executed, it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance eye effect in step S25TM1150, it is decided to execute the comment notice effect of the second aspect in step S25TM1190, and the final active display is performed in step S25TM1230. It is assumed that the display mode is determined to be the red mode, the change effect is determined to be executed, and the change pattern is set to the change pattern 208 in step S25TM1250.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol [third layer] is executed in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Execute. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of a decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one hold display 25TM001 [third layer] of the normal mode is displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol [third layer] is being executed, a new start is made. It is assumed that a prize is generated and the first reserved memory number is 2 (timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 9-14). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 executes a blackout effect at the time of winning based on the received command, and displays the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011. Is continuously arranged, and the hold change effect is executed as the change effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased, and the first hold display area 25TM0011 is red. The hold display 25TM001C [third layer] of the aspect is newly arranged. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer, as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode). , Red mode hold display 25TM001C, normal mode active display 25TM003) [third layer] is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state) due to reduced visibility.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, the first black is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 “2” [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 “0” [first layer], And the visibility of the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes a flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white, and reproduces and outputs the light emitting sound effect A once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the covering image on the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [No. 1] after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the blackout effect at the time of winning. The second layer] is changed to the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the image display device. The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the decorative symbols [third layer] (“243” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011. The hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red aspect is continuously arranged. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer, as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display 25TM001 in the normal mode). , Red mode hold display 25TM001C, normal mode active display 25TM003) [third layer] is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state) due to reduced visibility.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the small symbols [first layer] (“243” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, the second black is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 “2” [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 “0” [first layer], And the visibility of the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 is black at the time of winning. The out effect is continuously executed, and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 and arranges it in the hold display area 25TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The reserved display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red aspect, which has been displayed, is shifted by one to the active display area 25TM013 side, and the reserved display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal aspect arranged in the reserved display area 25TM011 is erased. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the comment notice effect of the second aspect, and in the third layer, a mini character and a second comment image (characters of "next, expectation!"" Are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. Comment image showing) [Third layer] is placed.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer, as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (holding display 25TM001C in red mode, The active display 25TM003) [third layer] in the normal mode, and the mini character and the second comment image [third layer] are in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state) due to reduced visibility.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first hold storage number of 1, "1" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, the second black is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 “1” [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 “0” [first layer], And the visibility of the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (5), the chance eye effect of the odd-numbered mode is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (in this example, the odd-numbered symbols). Combination "135") is stopped in an expanded mode (periods T5A to T5B shown in FIGS. 9-14). After that, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the blackout effect at the time of winning at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 9-14). The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“135” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode is placed in the hold display area 25TM011. It is continuously placed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer, as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display 25TM001C in the red aspect). , Active display 25TM003 in the normal mode) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered and it is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the small symbols [first layer] (“135” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, the second black is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 “1” [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 “0” [first layer], And the visibility of the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display which is the target of the notice of the blackout effect at the time of winning) (FIG. 9-14). (At the timing of T7 shown), the effect control CPU 120 ends the blackout effect at the time of winning, executes the first effect in the connection zone effect, erases the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], and erases the image. A flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the characters "Battle ZONE" is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the display device 5. In addition, the background image of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer] to the special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] showing the landscape of the volcano including the night sky, mountains, eruption, and the characters "Battle ZONE". It is changing to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes an active change effect as the change effect when the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and arranges the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red mode in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 is erased.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer, as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], a special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as a background image, a decorative pattern [third layer], and a corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in a red aspect) [ The visibility of the third layer] is reduced and it is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the first hold storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, the flame effect image is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 "0" [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 "0" [first layer], and small The visibility of the design [first layer] is not deteriorated.
??

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (7), at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 is the third in the connection zone effect. When one effect is completed, the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed (shifting from the first effect to the second effect), the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased, and a special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 25TM200B [4th layer] is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to change the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red aspect in the active display area 25TM013.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since neither image is displayed on the second layer having a higher display priority than the fourth layer and the third layer, the special background image 25TM200B as the background image The visibility of the [fourth layer], the decorative design [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in the red aspect) [third layer] has been improved, and all of them are in a visible state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer <the first layer, whether or not the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed. Regardless of this, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 "0" [first layer], the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 "0" [first layer], and the small symbol [first layer] are all. It is in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (8), at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 is the second in the connection zone effect. The production is continuously executed, and the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and turns off the light emitting body 25TM100.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 puts the decorative symbol [third layer] of "7" into a reach state by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol [third layer] of "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, and causes the image display device 5 to reach the state. The characters "Reach !!" [3rd layer] are displayed at the top. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red mode in the active display area 25TM013.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Even in the display area 5r, the small symbol [first layer] is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing that should be developed into super reach in the fluctuation pattern (timing of T10 shown in FIGS. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the connection zone effect and erases the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer]. Then, either the battle B effect or the battle C effect is executed.

(Example of production when starting prize is won in a specific period)
Next, a new start prize is generated in a specific period (that is, a period of either the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period), and in the start prize effect determination process of the first embodiment, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye. An example of the effect when it is decided to execute the effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-16 and 9-17.

FIG. 9-16 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, and FIG. 9-17 is the effect related to each of these effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an image. In FIG. 9-17, an aspect of the light emitting body 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity (upper right portion) of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the effect drawing.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 skips step S25TM1050, which determines whether or not to execute the winning blackout effect, by determining YES in step S25TM1030. In step S25TM1100, it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, in step S25TM1150 it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance eye effect, and in step S25TM1190, the comment notice effect of the second aspect is executed. In step S25TM1230, the final display mode of the active display is determined to be the red mode, and it is determined to execute the change effect, and in step S25TM1250, the change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 208.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol [third layer] is executed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation of the small symbol [first layer] is executed. The display is running. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of a decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one hold display 25TM001 [third layer] of the normal mode is displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“243” in this example) is fixedly stopped. Then, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the first reserved memory number is 2 when the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "out of time (no time reduction)" is fixed and stopped (FIG. 9). The timing of T2A shown in -16). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes a flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white, and reproduces and outputs the light emitting sound effect A once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the hold display area 25TM011. Is continuously displayed, and a hold change effect is executed as a change effect based on the reception of a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased, and the first hold display area 25TM0011 is red. Hold display 25TM001C [third layer] of the mode is newly displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is produced. Is not executed, so that the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (hold display 25TM001 in normal mode, hold display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "2" of first hold storage number display area 25TM015 "[First layer]," 0 "[first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and the small symbol [first layer] are all in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 emits white light. At the time of winning a prize, the flash effect is continuously executed, and the illuminant 25TM100 is blinking in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Let me. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 and is displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode that has been displayed is shifted by one to the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 is erased. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the comment advance effect of the second aspect, and the mini character 25TM400 and the second comment image 25TM450 (characters "Next, expectation!" Are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5). Comment image) Display [3rd layer].

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first hold storage number of 1, "1" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is produced. Is not executed, so that the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (hold display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" [first layer] of the first hold storage number display area 25TM015, The "0" [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are both visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the odd-numbered chance eye effect at the timing when the chance eye effect should be executed, and enters the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , The combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, the combination of odd symbols "135") is stopped and displayed in an enlarged mode (the period from T4A to T4B shown in FIGS. 9-16). Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and displays the hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the hold display area 25TM011. Display continuously. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first hold storage number of 1, "1" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is produced. Is not executed, so that the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (hold display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" [first layer] of the first hold storage number display area 25TM015, The "0" [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are both visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance eye effect. Is terminated, and the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“135” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the hold display area 25TM011. Is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved storages is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of the small symbols [first layer] (“135” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off (no time reduction)" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is produced. Is not executed, so that the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (hold display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" [first layer] of the first hold storage number display area 25TM015, The "0" [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are both visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display which is the target of the advance notice of the flash effect at the time of winning) (shown in FIG. 9-16). (At the timing of T6), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitter 25TM100 to blink white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Let me. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes an active change effect as a change effect when the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and displays an active display 25TM003C [third layer] in a red mode in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the hold display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode displayed in the hold display area 25TM011 is erased. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, since the first hold storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the first hold storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second hold Since the number of stored items is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved stored number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the connection zone effect is executed. Since the covering image (flame effect image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding background image are supported. Display (active display 25TM003C in red aspect) [third layer], "0" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. , And the small symbol [first layer] are both visible.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (8), at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 is the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. In addition, the decorative symbol [third layer] of "7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" [third layer] are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, and turns off the light emitting body 25TM100.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red mode in the active display area 25TM013. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Even in the display area 5r, the small symbol [first layer] is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <third layer <second layer <first layer, but in this example, the connection zone effect is executed. Since the covering image (flame effect image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding background image are supported. Display (active display 25TM003C in red aspect) [third layer], "0" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025. , And the small symbol [first layer] are both visible.

<Second Embodiment>
[Production decision processing at the time of starting prize]
9-18 and 9-19 are the second embodiments of the flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. In the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect determination process at the start of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19. Execute.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, the steps of steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to step S25TM1270 in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment are shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9 Since the steps are the same as those of steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to step S25TM1270 in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment shown in -7, the description thereof is omitted here, and only step S25TM1135 will be described. To do.

When the process of step S25TM1130 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific flag is set (step S25TM1135). When the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. If the specific flag is not set (NO in step S25TM1135), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1140.

In this way, when the specific flag is not set (that is, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed and it is not decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning), the start winning is won. In the start winning effect determination process when it occurs, it is possible to perform the process of step S25TM1020 or less by determining NO in step S25TM1010. At this time, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S25TM1050), and if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (step S25TM1060). In (YES), a specific flag is set (step S25TM1080), and if YES is determined in step S25TM1135, the processing in step S25TM1140 or lower is skipped. That is, each of a process of determining whether or not the chance eye effect is executed (step S25TM1150), a process of determining whether or not the comment notice effect is executed (step S25TM1190), and a process of determining whether or not the change effect is executed (step S25TM1230). The process will be skipped. Therefore, at least during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the execution of the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect is restricted.

In addition, in FIG. 9-15, a new start prize is generated in a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from both the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period), and the effect at the time of the start prize of the first embodiment is produced. An example of an effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the determination process has been shown, but an example of an effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the effect determination process at the time of starting winning in the second embodiment. May be the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 9-15.

That is, when it is decided to execute various effects based on the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the image display device 5 has an effect image similar to the effect image shown in FIGS. 9-15. It may be displayed. In this case, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is restricted.

Further, in FIG. 9-17, a new start prize is generated during a specific period (that is, a period of either the symbol stop period or the symbol determination period), and various effects are produced in the start prize effect determination process of the first embodiment. Although an example of the effect when it is decided to execute the above is shown, an example of the effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the effect determination process at the time of starting winning in the second embodiment is also shown in FIG. 9-17. It may be the same as the production example shown.

That is, when it is decided to execute various effects based on the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the image display device 5 has an effect image similar to the effect image shown in FIGS. 9-17. It may be displayed. In this case, when the blackout effect is not executed at the time of winning, a predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is executed.

(Production at the time of winning)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to [Explanation of the feature unit 25TM] of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine provided with a movable body 25TM500 which is an accessory in the vicinity (lower part) of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the movable body 25TM500 can operate between the tilted position (initial position) and the standing position (effect position) according to the control of the effect control board 12. When the movable body 25TM500 is in the tilted position, the movable body 25TM500 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. However, it is assumed that at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5 in the process of operating the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the standing position. To do.

In the present embodiment, an example in which a blackout effect at the time of winning and a flash effect at the time of winning can be executed as a special effect for notifying that the jackpot expectation of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is high at the timing when the starting winning is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other special effects may be executed. For example, as a special effect, a prize-winning accessory effect using the movable body 25TM500 may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), the effect control CPU 120 can execute the winning accessory effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning accessory effect is a golden effect image 25TM600A [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when it is decided to execute the winning accessory effect at the time of starting winning. Is an example of a notice effect for executing a movable body operation effect for operating the movable body 25TM500 from a tilted position to an upright position. The display color of the golden effect image 25TM600A in the prize-winning character production is gold, and the player can recognize that the jackpot expectation of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is high by executing the prize-winning character production. ..

Specifically, the winning accessory production is based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, and at the timing of the starting winning, the golden effect image 25TM600A [second] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying [Layer], it is suggested that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) becomes a big hit. In this case, the prize-winning character effect is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

In the present embodiment, when the winning bonus effect is started based on the judgment result at the start winning, the winning bonus effect is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the starting prize (at the target of the winning bonus effect). It shall be continuously executed until the timing when a certain fluctuation display) is started.

In the present embodiment, the background image [fourth layer], the decorative pattern [third layer], and the decorative pattern [third layer] are displayed by displaying the golden effect image [second layer] as the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Corresponding display (hold display, active display) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered to make it difficult to see (non-display state). Further, in the process of the movable body 25TM500 operating from the tilted position to the upright position, or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the upright position, at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5. , The visibility of the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. That is, the visibility of the effect image ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (particularly, the center of the effect image). Visibility of the part) is reduced.

Here, the background image [4th layer], the decorative design [3rd layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] are continuously in a difficult-to-see state due to the effect of the winning accessory. , As shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), “2” [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, “0” [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and The small symbols [first layer] of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r remain visible.

In this way, the visibility of the background image [4th layer], the decorative design [3rd layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] is reduced due to the effect of the winning accessory. The movable body 25TM500 is in the process of operating from the tilted position to the standing position, or in the standing position, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and the small symbol display of the image display device 5. Since it is not located in front of the areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the visibility of the reserved memory value [1st layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] is reduced even during the execution period of the winning accessory effect. It is in a state where it can be continuously visually recognized without doing anything.

As described above, the prize-winning accessory effect is an example of a special effect performed by using the image display device 5 for displaying the golden effect image 25TM600A [second layer] and the movable body 25TM500 in the movable body motion effect. On the other hand, the winning flash effect is an example of a special effect performed by using the light emitting body 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R (reproduction output device of the light emitting sound effect A or the light emitting sound effect B). In this way, the prize-winning accessory effect as a special effect is an effect executed using two effect devices (image display device 5 and movable body 25TM500), and the prize-winning flash effect as a special effect is a prize-winning effect. This is an effect performed by using two effect devices (light emitter 25TM100 and speakers 8L, 8R), which are different from the time-effect effect. Then, the production device used for the production differs (does not overlap) between the prize-winning character production and the prize-winning flash production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference in the types of special effects, so that it is possible to give different impressions to the player depending on the types of special effects.

It should be noted that a part of the effect device common to the prize-winning sound effect and the prize-winning flash effect may be used. For example, in the prize-winning sound effect, the movable body 25TM500, the image display device 5, and the speaker may be used. While 8L and 8R (a device for reproducing and outputting sound effects when an accessory operates) are used, in the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emitting body 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R (light emitting sound effect A or light emitting effect) are used. A device for reproducing and outputting sound B) may be used. In this case, the prize-winning accessory effect as a special effect is an effect executed by using three effect devices (image display device 5, movable body 25TM500, and speakers 8L, 8R), and is a special effect. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect executed by using two production devices (light emitter 25TM100) different from the character effect at the time of winning and a production device (speakers 8L, 8R) common to the character effect at the time of winning. Is. In this way, it is possible to clarify the difference in the type of special effect depending on the number of effect devices used for the special effect, and give the player a different impression depending on the type of special effect.

(Blessing character production)
In the present embodiment, in the battle production, the ally character is launching the final attack on the enemy character, and the predetermined timing (the timing at which the operation promotion display should be displayed, for example, 5 seconds before the display result is stopped and displayed). In the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display imitating the shape of the stick controller 31A, a time bar for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and "close". Display the characters "!!".

At this time, if a battle effect of a variable pattern accompanied by a super reach in which the display result is a "big hit" is executed, the big hit is generated at the timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A. A blessing character production to bless (notify) is executed. Then, after the blessing character production is executed, the ally character defeats the enemy character and the jackpot symbols are aligned. In the blessing accessory production, the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 is operated from the tilted position to the standing position. When the motion effect is executed, it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display color of the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B in the blessing character production is rainbow color, and the player can recognize that a big hit is generated by executing the blessing character production.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (B), the background image [2nd layer] is displayed by displaying the iridescent effect image 25TM600B [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer], production image related to battle production [3rd layer] is in a difficult-to-see state due to reduced visibility (3rd layer) Hidden state). Further, in the process of the movable body 25TM500 operating from the tilted position to the upright position, or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the upright position, at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5. , The visibility of the image display device 5 is reduced. That is, the visibility of the effect image ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (particularly, the center of the effect image). Visibility of the part) is reduced.

Here, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer], and the production image related to the battle production [3rd layer] are produced by the blessing accessory effect. [Layer] continues to be in a difficult-to-see state, but as shown in FIG. 9-20 (B), “0” [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, the second reserved storage number display area. The “0” [first layer] of 25TM025 and the small symbols [first layer] of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r remain visible.

In this way, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer], and the production image related to the battle production [3rd layer] are produced by the blessing accessory effect. While the visibility of [3 layers] is reduced, the movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the upright position, or in the upright position, the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, the third layer of the image display device 5. 2 Since it is not located in front of the reserved storage number display area 25TM025 and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the value of the reserved storage number [first layer] is small even during the execution period of the blessing accessory effect. The visibility of the design [first layer] is continuously visible without deterioration.

In this way, in the prize-winning accessory effect and the blessing accessory effect, the effect image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 stands up from the tilted position. It is a common effect mode in that it executes a movable body motion effect that operates at a position. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the prize-winning bonus effect, which is a common effect mode with the blessing accessory effect as the jackpot notification effect, as the look-ahead advance notice effect.

In the prize-winning accessory effect and the blessing accessory effect, the effect image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 is operated from the tilted position to the upright position. Although it is a common effect mode in that the movable body motion effect is executed, the mode of the effect image [second layer] which is a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (effect image [second layer]). ] Type) is different.

That is, in the prize production, the golden effect image 25TM600A (display color: gold) suggesting (notifying) that the jackpot expectation of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is high is the entire display screen of the image display device 5. The rainbow color effect image 25TM600B (display color: rainbow color), which is displayed as a covering image covering the image and suggests (notifies) that a big hit will occur based on the variable display being executed, is displayed as an image. It is displayed as a covered image covering the entire display screen of the device 5. As described above, there is a difference in the production mode (display color of the effect image) between the prize-winning character production and the blessing character production. Therefore, the player can easily grasp which of the prize-winning character effect and the blessing character effect is executed when the movable body motion effect is executed together with the effect that the covered image is displayed on the entire screen. ..

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-15, when a winning black effect is executed as a special effect, a blackout image [second layer] is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying (the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (holding display 25TM001C in the red aspect) are displayed. ) [Third layer] and the mini character and the comment image [third layer] are in a difficult-to-see state due to reduced visibility. That is, during the period when the black effect at the time of winning is being executed, the change effect using the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer], the chance eye effect using the decorative pattern [third layer], and the chance eye effect. The visibility of the comment notice effect using the mini character and the comment image [third layer] is lowered, and it is difficult to see. In this way, when the black effect at the time of winning is executed, the change effect, the chance eye effect, and the comment notice effect can be executed, but the display of the effect image related to each effect is restricted, and each effect has its own effect. The effect image is invisible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the winning black effect is not executed and the winning flash effect is executed as a special effect, the covered image (black) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is used. Since the out image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer])) is not displayed, the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (holding display 25TM001C in red mode) are not displayed. ) [Third layer], and the mini character and the comment image [third layer] are both visible.

In this way, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed without executing the black effect at the time of winning, the change effect using the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer], the decorative pattern [third layer] The visibility of each effect of the chance eye effect using the above and the comment notice effect using the mini character and the comment image [third layer] has not deteriorated, and each effect is in a visible state. .. That is, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the change effect, the chance eye effect, and the comment notice effect can all be executed in a visible manner, and the black at the time of winning is black. Compared to the case where the out effect is executed, the visibility of the effect is not restricted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), the jackpot expectation is higher when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed than when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), the jackpot expectation is higher when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed. When the effect is executed, the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), the jackpot expectation is higher when the chance eye effect is executed than when the chance eye effect is not executed, and the chance eye effect is executed. In this case, the odd-numbered chance-eye effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the even-numbered chance-eye effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10, when the comment notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the comment notice effect is not executed, and the comment notice effect is executed. In, the comment notice effect of the second aspect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the comment notice effect of the first aspect. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the jackpot expectation is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed, and the final display mode of the active display is changed to a special mode. Change effect of special mode to be changed <Change effect of blue mode to change the final display mode of active display to blue mode <Change effect of red mode to change the final display mode of active display to red mode Is high.

Therefore, among the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, the larger the number of combined effects (the greater the number of combined effects), the higher the expectation of big hit. Will be higher. For example, when all the effects of the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect are executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when only the comment notice effect is executed. It's getting higher.

In addition, if the number of combined effects is the same among the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect (the number of combined effects is the same). In some cases), the higher the number of production modes with high expectation of big hits, the higher the expectation of big hits than when the number of productions with high expectations for big hits is small. For example, when a blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at the time of winning in a red light emitting mode, a chance eye effect at an odd number mode, a comment notice effect at the second aspect, and a change effect at the time of a red aspect are executed, a blackout effect at the time of winning is performed. , The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning in the white light emitting mode, the chance eye effect in the even number mode, the comment notice effect in the first aspect, and the change effect in the special mode are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060). YES or NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs the processing after step S25TM1090. That is, in both the case where it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning and the case where it is not decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES or NO in step S25TM1060). , The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance eye effect is executed (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), the process of determining whether or not the comment notice effect is executed (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220), and whether or not the change effect is executed. Processing (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) is being performed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness in that the display mode of the display screen of the image display device 5 suddenly changes over a wide range by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning. .. In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed together with the blackout effect at the time of winning, the player can improve the interest by paying attention to the degree of compounding of the predetermined effects (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect). On the other hand, even when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, the process for determining whether or not the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is executed and the effect mode is executed, so that the effect control is related. It is possible to standardize the processes (determination process regarding whether or not the effect is executed, determination process of the effect mode).

As shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing determined to execute the winning blackout effect at the time of starting winning (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 is blacked out at the time of winning. The blackout effect at the time of winning is performed at the timing (timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 9-14) when the production is started and the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variation display which is the target of the blackout effect at the time of winning) is started. At the same time as finishing, the connection zone production is being executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning at the start winning (the timing of T2 shown at FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 is at the time of winning. The flash effect is started, and the flash effect at the time of winning is ended at a predetermined timing (in this example, the timing at which the reach is established) in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). , Performing reach production.

According to such a configuration, the connection zone effect is executed at the timing when the blackout effect at the time of winning as a special effect ends, and the reach effect is executed at the timing when the flash effect at the time of winning as a special effect ends. It is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode when the special production is completed. Further, since the production mode when the special production is completed differs depending on the type of the special production, the production can be further diversified.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the blackout image (first blackout) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) is displayed. At this time, a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is continuously arranged on the fourth layer as a background image of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer <the second layer, the blackout image (first) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the visibility of the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is lowered and visually recognized. It is in a difficult state (hidden state). According to such a configuration, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, it is possible to give the player a special feeling and unexpectedness of the effect and improve the interest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the blackout image (first blackout) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) is displayed.

At this time, the decorative symbol [third layer] is changed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, or the decorative symbol [3rd layer] is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of [third layer] (in this example, "243" and "135") is fixedly stopped. Further, the active display (active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode) is continuously arranged in the active display area 25TM013, and the hold display (hold display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode] is held in the hold display area 25TM011. ) Is continuously placed.

At this time, the value of the first reserved number ("1" [first layer], "2" [first layer]) is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the image is displayed. The value of the second reserved storage number (“0” [first layer]) is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 of the display device 5. Further, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbol [first layer] is continuously executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the third layer <second layer <first layer, the covered image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered. By displaying the blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (hold display) , Active display) While the visibility of the [third layer] is reduced and it is difficult to see (non-display state), the value of the first reserved storage number [first layer] and the second reserved storage number The visibility of the value [first layer] and the small symbol [first layer] is not deteriorated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of information related to the game while enhancing the effect of the blackout effect at the time of winning.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, even when it is determined to execute the winning blackout effect in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060). Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the processing after step S25TM1090. That is, even when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180). ), A process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) are performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, the process of determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to standardize and simplify the processing in the effect control.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, when it is determined to execute the winning blackout effect in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment (YES in step S25TM1060). ), The effect control CPU 120 sets a specific flag (step S25TM1080). When the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the effect control CPU 120 skips the processing after step S25TM1140. That is, when it is determined to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180). The process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220) and the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) are skipped.

According to such a configuration, the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, so that the visibility of the display screen of the image display device 5 is lowered and it becomes difficult to see, so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. it can. In addition, when the flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player pays attention to the degree of compounding of the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment advance effect, change effect) as the look-ahead advance notice effect. You can improve your interest. In addition, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the process of determining whether or not the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect), which is the effect to be restricted, is executed (execution / non-execution determination process, effect mode). By not performing the determination process) itself, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the predetermined effect is restricted, and the process in the effect control can be optimized.

As mentioned above, the greater the number of combined effects (the number of combined effects) among the winning flash effect, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, and change effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit. ing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (5), when the flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, a predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment advance notice effect, change effect) as another look-ahead advance notice effect is performed. ) Can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the degree of compounding of a predetermined effect (the number of effects executed in combination, the pattern of combination) when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), during the period in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the blackout image (first) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative symbol [third layer] is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ] Is reduced in visibility, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (5), even during the period in which the flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, The decorative pattern [third layer] is visible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the start prize occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol in the variable display during execution. When it is any timing of the fixed period (that is, when it is the timing of the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the blackout effect at the time of winning. The process of determining the presence or absence (process of step S25TM1040 to step S25TM1080) is skipped. Therefore, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning based on the starting prize generated within the specific period is restricted, and in the present embodiment, the black at the time of winning targeting the variable display corresponding to the starting prize generated within the specific period. Out production is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the start prize occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol stop period in the variable display during execution. Regardless of the timing of the symbol determination period (that is, any timing of the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES or NO in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the flash effect is executed at the time of winning. (Processing in steps S25TM1090 to S25TM1130) is being performed. Therefore, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting prize generated within the specific period is not restricted, and in the present embodiment, the flash at the time of winning targeting the variable display corresponding to the starting prize generated within the specific period. The production can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted during the symbol stop period for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol and the symbol confirmation stop period for fixing and stopping the decorative symbol. The state in which the combination of decorative symbols suggesting (notifying) is visible continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the display result of the variable display. On the other hand, during the symbol stop period for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol and the symbol confirmation stop period for fixing and stopping the decorative symbol, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not restricted, so that the opportunity to execute the special effect can be secured and the interest is improved. it can.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, there are two types of effect modes (white light emitting mode and red light emitting mode) of the flash effect at the time of winning, whichever effect mode. Expectations for big hits differ depending on the crab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, there is only one type of effect of the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the degree of expectation of a big hit depends on the effect mode. It doesn't differ. According to such a configuration, by unifying the production mode of the blackout production at the time of winning, the production mode of the blackout production at the time of winning is clarified and impressed by the player, and the big hit expectation of the blackout production at the time of winning is expected. The degree can also be clarified.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display result is "off (with time reduction)", the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is 0%, while the display result is "big hit". In that case, the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is 60%. Therefore, when the display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than when the display result is "off (with time reduction)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), when the display result is "off (with time reduction)", the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning is 10% (white light emission mode: 10%, red light emission mode). : 0%) On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning is 70% (white light emission mode: 20%, red light emission mode: 50%). Therefore, when the display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than when the display result is "off (with time reduction)".

According to such a configuration, when the display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the special effect is higher than when the display result is "off (with time reduction)", and the special effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit.

(Other variants)
(1) In the first embodiment described above, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), various production images of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display [third layer], mini character and comment An example is shown in which the visibility of the image [third layer] and the background image [fourth layer]) is lowered to make it difficult to see. You may try to limit it.

For example, in the comment notice effect, a mini character and a comment image are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character voice sound corresponding to the character shown in the comment image is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is supposed to be done. Here, in the first embodiment described above, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, and when the comment notice effect is executed, black is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the out image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the mini character of the image display device 5 and the comment image [third layer] can be visually recognized. The property is reduced to make it difficult to see. On the other hand, since the playback output of the character voice sound is not restricted, the playback output of the character voice sound ("next, chance?", "Next, expectation!") Is possible in response to the execution of the comment notice effect. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the mini character and the comment image [third layer], the player can recognize that the comment notice effect has been executed by the character voice sound.

Not limited to such a form, when the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the mini character and the comment image [third layer] is lowered and visually recognized. In addition to making it difficult, the reproduction output of the character voice sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be limited. For example, during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the comment notice effect is executed in a mode that is difficult to see in the third layer, and the character voice sound corresponding to the comment notice effect is not reproduced and output. You may do so.

In addition, compared to the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed is better. , The volume of the character voice sound may be lowered. That is, compared to the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the prize-winning blackout effect is not executed, the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the prize-time blackout effect is executed is better. , The character voice sound may be difficult to recognize.

(2) In the first and second embodiments described above, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the image display device 5 is used to obtain a predetermined effect image (for example, the emission color of the game effect lamp 9). It may be possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect for displaying the effect image of the corresponding display color on the third layer.

For example, in the first embodiment described above, when the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be visually recognized and the game effect lamp. If the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period when the 9 emits light in the predetermined light emitting mode and the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see, while the game effect lamp. 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. Unlike this example, when the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect is not executed at the time of winning, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be visually recognized and the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. When the predetermined light emitting mode is emitted and the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. Control or blinking control may not be performed (no light emission).

Further, in the second embodiment described above, when the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be visually recognized and the game effect lamp. While 9 emits light in a predetermined light emitting mode, it is not determined that the predetermined light emitting effect is executed based on the setting of the specific flag during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. Good.

(3) In the above embodiment, the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the time when the reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the flash effect at the time of winning may be ended at another timing.

For example, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect that makes one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner. In the variable display that is the target of the advance notice of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning may be ended at the start timing of the pseudo continuous effect. Further, in the variation display that is the target of the advance notice of the flash effect at the time of winning, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by super reach, the flash effect at the time of winning may be terminated at the timing of developing into super reach.

(4) In the above embodiment, there is only one type of effect of the blackout effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of types of effect modes are provided as the effect mode of the blackout effect at the time of winning. May be good.

For example, as the winning blackout effect, the winning blackout effect of the first special aspect and the winning blackout effect of the second special aspect can be executed. In the winning blackout effect of the first special aspect, the blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [first] is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 2 layers]) is displayed. On the other hand, the winning blackout effect of the second special aspect has a higher transmittance than the blackout image used in the blackout effect of the first special aspect as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. For example, it is assumed that a special blackout image (with a transmittance that allows the third layer and the fourth layer to be slightly visible) is displayed. At this time, the jackpot expectation is higher when the winning blackout effect of the second special aspect is executed than when the winning blackout effect of the first special aspect is executed. Not limited to such a form, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the blackout effect at the time of winning in the first special aspect is executed than in the case where the blackout effect at the time of winning in the second special aspect is executed. It may be made higher.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "small hit", a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at the time of winning) and a predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change). The execution rate of each of the effects) is set to 0%, but not limited to this form, when the display result is a "small hit", a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning), The execution ratio of at least one of the predetermined effects (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) may be different from 0%. That is, when the display result is "small hit", at least one of the special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning) and the predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is performed. It may be feasible.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the advance notice effects such as the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect is executed. Is shown as an example that is not decided, but it is not limited to such a form, and even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, among the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. One or two types of advance notice effects may be feasible. That is, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, a smaller number of types of advance notice effects can be executed than when it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. Good.

(7) In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the advance notice effects such as the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect is executed. Shows an example that is not determined. Not limited to such a form, if it is decided to execute a blackout effect at the time of winning, one or more of the chance eye effect, the comment advance effect, and the change effect can be executed. , The advance notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than when it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning.

(8) In the above embodiment, when a start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period), the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed for the variable display corresponding to the start prize. An example is shown. Not limited to such a form, when a start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period), it is possible to execute a blackout effect at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the start prize. However, a blackout effect at the time of winning is executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting prize at a lower rate than when the starting prize occurs in a period different from the symbol suspension period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period). You may do so.

(9) In the above embodiment, when a start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period), the blackout effect at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the start prize is restricted. However, not limited to this, a start prize is generated when the remaining period until the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) even if it is not within the symbol stop period. If this is the case, the blackout effect at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning may be restricted. Further, for a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach), the start is performed when the remaining period until the fluctuation display based on the specific fluctuation pattern ends is within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds). When a prize is generated, the blackout effect at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the starting prize may be restricted.

(10) In the above embodiment, only when both the determination result at the start winning and the display result of the variation display during execution regarding the hold memory are "missing (no time reduction)" (YES in step S25TM1020). An example is shown in which a blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance eye effect, and a comment notice effect can be executed. Even if any of the display results of the variable display of is not "missing (no time reduction)", one of the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, and the comment notice effect. More than one type of production may be feasible.

For example, even if either the judgment result at the start winning of the hold memory or the display result of the variable display during execution is "missing (with time reduction)", the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance It may be possible to execute one or more of the eye effect and the comment notice effect. In such a configuration, the fluctuation display-related symbol determination period (for example, 20 seconds) in which the display result is "off (with time reduction)" is the fluctuation in which the display result is "off (no time reduction)" as described above. It is different from the symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds) related to the display. Here, if a start prize occurs during the symbol determination period (for example, 20 seconds) related to the variable display in which the display result is "off (with time reduction)", the same as when YES is determined in step S25TM1030, as in the case where YES is determined in step S25TM1030. The blackout effect will not be executed at the time of winning.

(11) In the above embodiment, when a start prize is generated during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed. Not limited to the form, even if the start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the blackout effect at the time of winning in some modes (some types) can be executed. It may be set to. For example, even if a start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the start prize is determined to be a big hit (or super reach). At that time, a special mode of blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed, which is accompanied by a reproduction output of a special winning sound that notifies that a big hit will occur (or develops into super reach). In addition, when a start prize occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed at a lower rate than when the start prize occurs outside the specific period. You may do so.

(12) In the above embodiment, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening (for example, within 0.5 seconds after the game ball wins in the starting winning opening), a blackout effect at the time of winning or a flash at the time of winning An example in which the production is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and for example, any timing within the period from the timing of the start winning prize to the end of the variable display executed at the timing of the starting winning prize. Then, the blackout effect corresponding to the start prize and the flash effect corresponding to the start prize may be executed. In addition, any of the period from the timing of the start winning to the end of the variation display executed at the timing of the start winning and the start of the next variation display (including the start of the next variation display). At the timing, a blackout effect corresponding to the start prize or a flash effect corresponding to the start prize may be executed.

As described above, the feature portion 25TM and each modified example include (means A1-1), (means A1-2), (means A1-3), (means A2) to (means A11) shown below. ) Is disclosed.

(Means A1-1) The start condition is satisfied (the game ball is won in the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (not controlled by either the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In addition, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display) based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0 and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. And
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the start condition, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect based on the determination by the determination means.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition.
It is possible to execute predetermined effects (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) at different timings from the special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning).
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation that is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning has a higher expectation of big hit than the flash effect at the time of winning).
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the display mode in the display means becomes a specific mode (when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 is lowered and it becomes difficult to see. ),
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined type of special effect and a predetermined effect in combination (as shown in FIG. 9-17, a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance eye effect, a comment notice effect, and a change. It is possible to combine with at least one of the productions),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-15, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed as the special effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the blackout image [2nd layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the above, a chance eye effect (decorative pattern [3rd layer]) and a comment notice effect (mini character and comment image [3rd layer]) , And the change effect (the visibility of the effect image related to the hold display [third layer]) is reduced and it becomes difficult to see),
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of compounding of the effect executed by the effect executing means (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect). Expectations for big hits vary depending on the number and mode of production),
It is possible to determine the execution of the predetermined effect in both the case where the specific type of special effect is executed and the case where the specific type of special effect is not executed (FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7). As described above, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (YES or NO in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 is A process of determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), a process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step). S25TM1270) is being performed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by making the display mode in the display means a specific mode, and at the same time, to be interested in the degree of complexity of the effect to be executed. On the other hand, since it is possible to determine the execution of a predetermined effect regardless of whether or not a specific type of special effect is executed, it is possible to standardize the processing in the effect control.

(Means A1-2) The start condition is satisfied (the game ball is won in the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is controlled. In addition, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display) based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0 and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. And
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the start condition, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect based on the determination by the determination means.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition.
It is possible to execute predetermined effects (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) at different timings from the special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning).
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation that is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning has a higher expectation of big hit than the flash effect at the time of winning).
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the display mode in the display means becomes a specific mode (when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 is lowered and it becomes difficult to see. ),
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined type of special effect and a predetermined effect in combination (as shown in FIG. 9-17, a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance eye effect, a comment notice effect, and a change. It is possible to combine with at least one of the productions),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the predetermined effect is restricted (as shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the winning blackout effect is achieved. (YES in step S25TM1060), a process of determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185). ~ Step S25TM1220), the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) is skipped to limit the execution of the predetermined effect),
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of compounding of the effects executed by the effect executing means (combined among the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance eye effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect). Expectations for big hits vary depending on the number and mode of production)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by making the display mode in the display means a specific mode, and at the same time, to be interested in the degree of complexity of the effect to be executed. On the other hand, when a specific type of special effect is executed, the predetermined effect is restricted, so that the processing in the effect control can be optimized.

(Means A1-3) The start condition is satisfied (the game ball is won in the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (not controlled by either the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In addition, a game that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by executing variable display of special identification information (variable display of special symbols) based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0). It is a machine (pachinko game machine 1),
Execution of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening). CPU 103) and
An effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect based on a determination by the determination means, and
In response to the execution of the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is displayed for a specific period (symbol stop period and symbol confirmation period). ), And a decorative variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be displayed over
With
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the start condition.
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation that is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning has a higher expectation of big hit than the flash effect at the time of winning).
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see (as shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when a prize-winning blackout effect is executed as a special effect, By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. The visibility is reduced and it becomes difficult to see),
When a predetermined type of special effect different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (6), only the flash effect at the time of winning as a special effect. Is executed, but the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. The visibility of [3rd layer] does not decrease and becomes visible),
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined type of special effect while restricting the execution of the specific type of special effect when the start condition is satisfied in the specific period (FIGS. 9-6 and 9). As shown in -7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred in a specific period, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted, but specified. Even with the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that occurred during the period, it is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information in a specific period, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, secure an opportunity to execute the special effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the means A1-3 may include a part of the configuration of the gaming machine of either the means A1-1 or the means A1-2.

(Means A2) A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to means A1-3.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the variable display (variable display) that is the target of a specific type of special effect (blackout effect at the time of winning), a specific type of special effect corresponds to the execution of the related effect (connection zone effect) related to the specific type of special effect. (As shown in Fig. 9-15 (6), the blackout effect at the time of winning is ended at the timing when the connection zone effect is started).
In the variable display (variable display) that is the target of the predetermined type of special effect (flash effect at the time of winning), the predetermined type of special effect is terminated in response to the execution of the predetermined effect that suggests that the control is controlled to the advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 9-15 (8), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended at the timing when the reach effect is started).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered when the special effect of a specific type is finished, and it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered when the special effect of a predetermined type is finished. ..

(Means A3) A gaming machine of any of means A1-1 to means A1-3 and means A2.
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the visibility of the effect background image in the display means is reduced (as shown in FIGS. 9-15 (1) and 9-15), the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. Then, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern is visually recognized. (It becomes difficult to see due to deterioration of sex)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player when a specific kind of special effect is executed.

(Means A4) A gaming machine of any of means A1-1 to means A1-3, means A2, and means A3.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, the first decorative identification information variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol) and the second variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the small symbol) are displayed by the display means (image display device 5). ) Is feasible and
As the hold information corresponding to the number of variable displays that have not been executed, the first hold information (hold display) and the second hold information (the value of the first hold storage number and the value of the second hold storage number) are displayed. It can be displayed on the means (image display device 5) and can be displayed.
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the visibility of the first decoration identification information and the visibility of the first reserved storage information are reduced, and the visibility of the second decoration identification information and the visibility of the second reserved storage information are reduced. Does not decrease (as shown in FIGS. 9-15, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. As a result, the visibility of the decorative symbol [third layer] and the hold display [third layer] is lowered and it becomes difficult to see, and the small symbol [first layer], the value of the first hold storage number [first layer], And the visibility of the value of the second reserved storage number [first layer] does not decrease and becomes visible)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of information related to the game while enhancing the effect of the special effect of a specific type.

(Means A5) A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to means A1-3 and means A2 to means A4.
The determination means (CPU 103) can determine whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the establishment of the start condition relating to the variable display.
The determination means (the process of determining the effect at the time of starting winning in the first embodiment) is
Based on the judgment by the judgment means (judgment result at the time of starting winning), it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect (chance eye effect, comment advance notice effect, change effect).
It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect in both the case where the specific type of special effect is executed and the case where the specific type of special effect is not executed (FIGS. 9-6 and FIG. As shown in 9-7, even when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180). ), A process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined advance notice effect regardless of whether or not a specific type of special effect is executed. Therefore, processing in the effect control can be standardized and simplified. Can be planned.

(Means A6) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A5.
The determination means (CPU 103) can determine whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the establishment of the start condition relating to the variable display.
The determination means (the process of determining the effect at the time of starting winning in the second embodiment) is
Based on the judgment by the judgment means (judgment result at the time of starting winning), it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect (chance eye effect, comment advance notice effect, change effect).
When a specific type of special effect is executed, it is not determined whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. If it is decided (YES in step S25TM1060), a process of determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220). ), The process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) is skipped).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when a specific type of special effect is executed, it is possible to optimize the processing in the effect control by not determining whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect.

(Means A7) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A6.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is an effect based on a determination (determination result at the time of starting winning) by the determination means, and is a predetermined effect different from a specific type of special effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, It is possible to combine and execute a predetermined type of advance notice production (flash production at the time of winning).
Expectations that are controlled to the advantageous state differ depending on the number of predetermined effects that are executed in combination with a predetermined type of advance notice effect (a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance eye effect, a comment advance effect, and a change effect). The higher the number of combined productions, the higher the expectation for big hits)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the number of predetermined effects executed in combination with the predetermined type of advance notice effects.

(Means A8) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A7.
The number of effect devices used for the special effect differs depending on the type of the special effect executed by the effect execution means (the prize-winning accessory effect as the special effect is two effect devices (image display device 5 and movable body 25TM500). ), While the flash effect at the time of winning as a special effect is executed using only one effect device (light emitter 25TM100)).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference in the types of special effects, and it is possible to give different impressions to the player depending on the types of special effects.

(Means A9) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A8.
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
Execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative design),
The decoration identification information can be visually recognized when a predetermined type of special effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 9-17, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the decoration symbol [third layer] is visually recognizable. It is possible),
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined type of special effect while restricting the execution of a specific type of special effect during the period when the decoration identification information is stopped (as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7). , In the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted with respect to the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred in the specific period, while the start that occurred in the specific period. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the winning, it is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information during the suspension period of the decoration identification information, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, secure an opportunity to execute the special effect.

(Means A10) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A9.
There is only one type of special production (there is only one type of blackout production at the time of winning).
There are a plurality of modes of the predetermined type of special effect, and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined type of special effect (the effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning is two types, a white light emitting mode and a red light emitting mode. The red light emission mode has a higher expectation of big hit than the white light emission mode).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the mode of the special effect of a specific type, and it is possible to clarify the difference from the special effect of a predetermined type, and it is possible to diversify the special effect.

(Means A11) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A10.
Compared to the case where the display result of the variable display (variable display) is the first display result (“missing (with time saving)”) which is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state). When the second display result (“big hit”) controlled to the advantageous state is obtained, the execution rate of the special effect is higher (as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), the display result is “big hit”. In the case of, the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case where the display result is "off (with time reduction)")
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be expected that the display result will be the second display result by executing the special effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by executing variable display of special identification information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and then the start condition is satisfied.
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is controlled based on the establishment of the start condition, and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a determination by the determination means,
A decorative variable display means capable of executing the variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the execution of the variable display of the special identification information and displaying the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information over a specific period.
With
The effect executing means can execute a special effect within a predetermined period from the establishment of the start condition.
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect.
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see, and it becomes difficult to see.
The decoration identification information can be visually recognized when a predetermined type of special effect different from the specific type is executed.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the start condition is satisfied in the specific period, it is possible to execute a predetermined type of special effect while restricting the execution of the specific type of special effect.

Images